JP6823106B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, the present invention relates to a game machine that can play a game using a game medium and controls a specific game state that is advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, there have been game machines that control a plurality of types of hits. The plurality of types of hits included a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a special gaming state. The first specific game state is a game state in which the period in which the accessory that opens and closes the big winning opening is controlled so that the game medium can easily enter is the first period (for example, normal jackpot and probability fluctuation (also referred to as "probability change"). It is a big hit, etc.). The second specific game state is a game state in which the period in which the accessory that opens and closes the large winning opening is controlled so that the game medium can easily enter is the second period, which is shorter than the first period (for example, sudden probability change big hit (for example, sudden change jackpot). It is also called "sudden big hit"). The special game state is the second period in which the accessory that opens and closes the large winning opening is controlled so that the game medium can easily enter, and the game state does not change after the end (for example, a small hit). Etc.).

Further, not only the signal output when controlled in the first specific gaming state and the signal output when controlled in the second specific gaming state, but also the signal output when controlled in the special gaming state. There was a game machine that outputs the signal to the outside (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This game machine does not output the signal of the special game state to the outside during the high base.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-67255

In such a game machine, there was room for further improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

(A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is stored in a holding storage means that can store information related to variable display as holding storage information and a holding storage means. A hold display means for displaying a hold display according to the hold storage information, a determination means capable of determining control to the advantageous state, and a determination means controlled to the advantageous state before the determination by the determination means. A notice for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state by changing the hold display to a display mode different from the normal mode and displaying the hold display based on the determination means capable of determining that and the determination result by the determination means. The notice effect executing means for executing the effect and the suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes are provided, and the notice effect execution means is displayed by the hold display means. The advance notice effect is executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays, and the suggestion effect is a display mode of the hold display. The production mode includes the first pattern suggesting that is changed and the second pattern suggesting that the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the effect mode is the same or similar halfway, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect is When the suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, including the first effect mode and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The rate of execution by the second pattern is lower than when the second pattern is performed, and the suggestion effect executing means is a hold display displayed in a normal mode with respect to a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. After executing the suggestion effect of the second pattern so as to have a higher ratio and executing the suggestion effect of the second effect mode according to the second pattern for the hold display of 1, the hold display of 1 is described. When the suggestion effect of the first effect mode is not executed and the advance notice effect execution means changes the hold display of the normal mode of 1 to a display mode different from the normal mode, the normal mode is included in the hold display. When there is a hold display in a display mode different from the mode, the rate of determination at a later timing as the timing to change is higher than in the case of the hold display in the normal mode .
(1) Another gaming machine according to the present invention can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball), performs variable display, and has a specific gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a big prize). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that is controlled to open the mouth (open control state), and is a hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage information, and the hold storage means that is stored in the hold storage means. The hold display means for displaying the hold display according to the hold storage information, the decision means for determining whether or not to control the specific game state, and whether the specific game state is controlled before the decision by the decision means. Based on the determination means for determining whether or not, and the determination result by the determination means, the possibility of being controlled to the specific gaming state is announced by changing the hold display to a display mode different from the normal mode and displaying the display. The notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect, the suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes, and the game medium provided in the game area (for example, the game area 7) are provided. A variable winning ball device (for example, a first state) that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) that is easy to enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is harder to enter or does not enter than the first state. 1 special variable winning ball device 20a, 2nd special variable winning ball device 20b) and a game control means for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state that is easier to control to the specific gaming state than in the normal gaming state (1 special variable winning ball device 20a, 2nd special variable winning ball device 20b). For example, in the game control microcomputer 560, in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 31, the time saving flag is set in step S167 when it is a normal jackpot, and the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set in steps S170 and S171 when it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden jackpot. In the small hit end process of FIG. 34, neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is changed.) In the specific game state, the period during which the variable winning ball device is controlled to the first state is set. The first specific gaming state (for example, the opening control state of the 15-round normal jackpot gaming state, the opening control state of the 15-round probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is the first period (for example, 29 seconds), and the variable winning ball device are described above. Includes a second specific gaming state (for example, an open control state of a sudden jackpot gaming state) in which the period controlled to the first state is a second period (for example, 0.1 seconds) shorter than the first period. , The game control means is when the second specific game state ends. The gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state (for example, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set in step S170 and step S171 of FIG. 31). ), The period in which the variable winning ball device is controlled to the first state is the second period, and the game state is not changed after the end (for example, the open control state of the small hit game state). (For example, in the small hit end processing of FIG. 34, neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is changed), and the special game state signal (for example, the big hit) is controlled when the special game state is controlled. The external output means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560, step S1063 in FIG. 39) for outputting a signal (see FIG. 63) to the outside of the game machine is further provided, and the external output means is the variable winning ball device. Continues for a specific period (for example, in the case of a small hit, 12.3 seconds in the low base state, 1.1 seconds in the high base state, see FIG. 63) after the change from the first state to the second state. Then, the special game state signal is output, and when the game state is controlled from a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a high base state, a probability change state, a time saving state) to the special game state, and when the game state is more favorable than the advantageous game state. The specific period is different from when the special gaming state is controlled from an unfavorable gaming state (for example, low base state, non-probability change state, non-time saving state) (for example, in the case of a small hit, in the low base state). 12.3 seconds (1.1 seconds in the high base state), a specific area provided in the game area (for example, a combination operating gate 33) is further provided, and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific area. It is determined that the winning combination operation gate 33 has been won in step S391 of FIG. 27 when the process is controlled to the second specific gaming state (for example, in the case of shifting to the first large winning opening pre-opening process in step S139 of FIG. 26). As a result, the opening of the large winning opening is started in step S396.) On the other hand, it is controlled to the special gaming state (for example, small in step S151 of FIG. 26), not based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific area. In the case of shifting to the hit opening pre-processing, the opening of the large winning opening is started in step S2467 of FIG. 32 without determining whether or not the winning combination operation gate 33 has been won.) Performs the suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays displayed by the hold display means.

According to such a configuration, the game is not monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the special game state signal of the special game state can be appropriately output to the outside of the game machine. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately recognizing that the special gaming state is controlled outside the gaming machine.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The advantageous gaming state is a state in which the special gaming state signal is more likely to be output by the external output means than the disadvantageous gaming state.
The specific period is shorter when controlled to the special gaming state in the advantageous gaming state than when controlled to the special gaming state in the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, lower in the case of a small hit). 12.3 seconds in the base state, 1.1 seconds in the high base state).

According to such a configuration, the specific period in which the special game state signal is output is shortened in the advantageous game state in which the trigger for outputting the special game state signal is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special game state signal that is output while being controlled to the special game state from continuing until the timing when the next special game state signal is output.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
In the effect executing means (for example, in the first modification and the second modification of the first embodiment), the effect execution means for executing the effect related to the time when the second specific game state is controlled and the time when the special game state is controlled is executed. A common roll effect, a common effect display, a notification that the winning combination operation gate 33 is aimed at, and a common end display are executed. It is related to when it is controlled by a sudden big hit and when it is controlled by a small hit. If you want to execute the effect, you are not limited to executing the common effect that makes it impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit, but you can display the game start screen according to the type of hit. It is further provided to execute, that is, to execute a related effect although the effect is different between the sudden big hit and the small hit.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in the second specific gaming state and the special gaming state.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
After the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the game area, the start condition (for example, the number of reserved storages) that allows the start of the variable display is Even if it is not 0, each can be identified based on the establishment of the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed). A specific display result (for example, a jackpot) predetermined to a variable display means that performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, variable display of a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and an effect symbol) and derives and displays a display result. When the symbol) is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the specific game state (for example, when the symbol confirmation time times out in step S132 of the game control microcomputer 560 and FIG. 26 and the symbol is confirmed, if it is a big hit. In step S139, the process shifts to the first large winning opening pre-opening process, and if it is a small hit, S151 shifts to the small hit pre-opening process.),
Numerical data extraction means (for example, game control microcomputer 560, steps S1216 and S1227 in FIG. 18) for extracting numerical data when the game medium passes through the starting region.
With respect to the variable display in which the game medium has passed through the start area but the start condition has not yet been satisfied, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). (For example, the hold storage means for storing as the first hold storage or the second hold storage) (for example, the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in FIG. 19B) and
A hold display means (for example, the total hold storage display unit 18c in FIG. 1) that displays the hold display in a predetermined display mode corresponding to each of the hold storages stored in the hold storage means.
Predetermining means (for example, game control) for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means when the start condition is satisfied. Microcomputer 560, steps S61, S62, S73) in FIG. 22 and
Variable display control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for effect control, step S1813 in FIG. 55, step S1845 in FIG. 58) that controls the variable display based on the determination result by the prior determination means.
Prior to the determination of the prior determination means, the specific determination means (for example, for game control) for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is the specific display result. Microcomputer 560, steps S1217, S1228) of FIG.
Based on the determination result by the specific determination means, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage indicates that the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means may be the specific display result. Is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode (for example, a special mode, a first special mode, a second special mode) and displayed to perform a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead effect). For example, step S1813 of FIG. 55 and step S1845 of FIG. 58 are executed based on the determination result of the look-ahead effect determination process in step S671 of FIG. 43 of the effect control microcomputer 100.
In the suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, in S67110 of the look-ahead effect determination process of FIG. 45 executed in step S671 of FIG. 43). Based on the determination result of FIG. 55, step S1813 of FIG. 55 and step S1845 of FIG. 58 are further provided.
In the notice effect executing means, whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays displayed by the hold display means (for example, the hold display changing flag is set. Depending on whether or not it is set, one of the hold displays displayed by the hold display means is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode and displayed at a different ratio (for example, effect control). Percentage of different determination values based on whether or not the hold display changing flag is set in steps S67104 and S67108 of the look-ahead effect determination process of FIG. 45 executed by the microcomputer 100 in FIG. 43. By selecting and using the look-ahead effect execution decision table set in step 1 and the look-ahead effect pattern change timing decision table, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed and the change timing when the look-ahead effect is executed, and the look-ahead effect decision process is determined. Based on the result, step S1813 of FIG. 55 and step S1845 of FIG. 58 are executed. See FIGS. 46, 48 to 51).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the display mode of the hold display when the advance notice effect is executed. As a result, the interest of the notice production can be enhanced.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
A start condition (for example, when the number of reserved storages is not 0, which is the first, after the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) provided in the game area). Variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of (a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed) is established. When the display (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol) is performed and a predetermined specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the above It is controlled to a specific game state (for example, when the symbol confirmation time times out in step S132 of FIG. 26, the game control microcomputer 560, and the symbol is confirmed, if it is a big hit, the first large winning opening pre-opening process is performed in step S139. If it is a small hit, it shifts to the small hit opening preprocessing in S151.),
Numerical data extraction means (for example, game control microcomputer 560, steps S1216 and S1227 in FIG. 18) for extracting numerical data when the game medium passes through the starting region.
With respect to the variable display in which the game medium has passed through the start area but the start condition has not yet been satisfied, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). (For example, the hold storage means for storing as the first hold storage or the second hold storage) (for example, the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in FIG. 19B) and
A hold display means (for example, the total hold storage display unit 18c in FIG. 1) that displays the hold storage stored in the hold storage means as a hold display, and
Predetermining means (for example,) for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means based on the establishment of the start condition. Game control microcomputer 560, steps S61, S62, S73) in FIG. 22 and
Prior to the determination of the prior determination means, the specific determination means (for example, game control) for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is the specific display result. Further equipped with a microcomputer 560 for use and steps S1217 and S1228) of FIG.
The display mode of the hold display is a normal mode (for example, "○": see FIG. 77 (A)) and a special mode (for example, "○") that is different from the normal mode, and six lines are drawn outside the normal mode. (See FIG. 78 (B)) and a first special aspect that is different from the normal aspect and the special aspect (eg, “x” is included in “◯”: see FIG. 77 (B1). ) And the second special aspect (for example, two "x" s are included in "○": see FIG. 77 (B2)).
A hold notice for displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold memory that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means in the first special mode or the second special mode according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. Refer to the effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S67106 and S67114 of FIG. 71, step S1813 of FIG. 76, step S1845 of FIG. 58, and FIG. 72 (B)) capable of executing the effect (for example, look-ahead effect). )
The effect executing means changes the hold display to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (for example, start winning timing, arbitrary shift timing, other arbitrary timing, etc.) and displays the display. When the hold display is displayed in the special mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines in step S67107 of FIG. 71 to execute the look-ahead effect in the second look-ahead effect pattern, FIG. (When step S67112 of 71 is executed), the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode by the time the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold display is started. The display is changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100, steps S1803 and S1811, S1813 in FIG. 76, step S1845 in FIG. 58, etc., see FIGS. 73, 74, 78, 79).

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to change the hold display to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings and display the hold display, the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display can be varied. When the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. As a result, the game entertainment can be improved.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a rear view which looked at the game machine from the back side. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of an output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of an input port in a game control means. It is a circuit diagram which shows the internal structure of a terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the CPU in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the judgment result designation command at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the production process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result specification command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process before opening the first big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a block diagram which shows various signals output to a terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows the information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the information output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the area (the winning judgment result storage buffer) which stores the winning judgment result. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the look-ahead effect execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st look-ahead effect change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd look-ahead effect change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd look-ahead effect change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 3rd look-ahead effect change timing determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead effect. It is a timing chart which shows the output of 2 jackpot signals. It is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden big hit and small hit. It is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden big hit and small hit in the first modification. It is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of a sudden big hit and a small hit in the second modification. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot display processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process before opening the first big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the suggestion effect mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead effect determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the look-ahead effect execution decision table and the final display mode decision table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the look-ahead effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the look-ahead effect change timing determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead effect based on the 1st look-ahead effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead effect based on the 2nd look-ahead effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead effect based on the 2nd look-ahead effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hit ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 3 and a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". There are "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol is not fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized with the same symbol and fluctuate, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 is not the jackpot symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a variable display of the effect symbol is performed as an effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed by the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. Not limited to this, for example, an effect having a predetermined story may be executed, and an effect of displaying the result of the story based on the result of the jackpot determination or the determination of the fluctuation pattern may be executed. For example, a professional wrestling or soccer match or a battle in which enemy or ally characters fight is performed, and if it is a big hit, a match or battle is won, and if it is out of the game, a match or battle is defeated. May be good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as victory or defeat, it is possible to execute an effect in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

A first special symbol display (first variable display means) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided on the left side of the upper part of the effect display device 9 on the game board 6. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. A second special symbol display (second variable display means) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided on the upper right side of the effect display device 9 on the game board 6. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display.

Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After winning 14), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and , The state in which the jackpot game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 14 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 13 and the second are provided. A variable winning ball device that opens and closes each of the starting winning openings 14 may be provided.

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 may be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening 13 may be further narrowed. By arranging the nails densely around 13 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the 1st start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the 1st starting winning opening 13, the winning rate of the 2nd starting winning opening 14 It may be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

At the lower part of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of two indicators (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. For example, it is realized by executing a process of performing display control in the display control process (step S22) of the timer interrupt process described later.

At the bottom of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold consisting of four indicators (for example, LEDs) that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storages. A storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. For example, it is realized by executing a process of performing display control in the display control process (step S22) of the timer interrupt process described later.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a total hold storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is provided. ing. In this embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the hold displays corresponding to the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. To. In addition, the total hold storage display unit 18c may display whether it is the first hold storage or the second hold storage in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold storage is displayed in red). , The second hold memory may be displayed in blue). Further, instead of the total hold storage display unit 18c, a first hold storage display unit for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit for displaying the second hold storage number may be provided. Good.

The effect display device 9 is used for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. (For) Performs variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. "Synchronization" means that the start time point and the end time point of the variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same), and the period of the variable display is almost the same (may be exactly the same). Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a first special variable winning ball device 20a is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The first special variable winning ball device 20a is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and a specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21a, so that the first big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the first prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a second special variable winning ball device 20b is provided below the first special variable winning ball device 20a. The second special variable winning ball device 20b is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21b, so that the second big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the second major winning opening is detected by the second count switch 23b.

Hereinafter, the first special variable winning ball device 20a and the second special variable winning ball device 20b may be collectively referred to as a special variable winning ball device, and the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are referred to as a large winning opening. May be generically referred to.

In this embodiment, the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, and then the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the game ball passes through the combination operation gate 33 and is detected by the combination operation switch 33a, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are alternately opened. It is controlled to be in a state. For example, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15 rounds) in the specific game state (in the present embodiment, the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit described later), the first big winning opening is set as the first round. Is controlled to the open state, and when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (or when a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses), the first major winning opening is controlled to the closed state, and as the second round, the second round. The two major winning openings are controlled to be open. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 32 described later, not only the probability variation big hit, the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot, but also the small hit, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening alternate. It is controlled to be in an open state.

For example, if only one big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening) is provided and the big winning opening is controlled to be open a predetermined number of times in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the big winning opening is used. When the round ends and the big winning opening is controlled to be closed when the big winning opening is reached, the game ball heading for the mouth is taken into the out opening 26 as it is. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1, if the two big winning openings are provided so as to be located one above the other and are controlled to be alternately opened in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the first Even if the first round ends and the first big prize opening is controlled to be closed when the game ball heading for the first big winning opening reaches the first big winning opening, the second big prize provided directly below Since the mouth is controlled to be open as the second round, there is a possibility of winning the second big winning mouth. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls taken into the out opening 26 without winning the big winning opening during the round of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). In this embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 20b is provided directly below the first special variable winning ball device 20a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special variable winning ball device 20a is directed toward the first special variable winning ball device 20a. The game ball may be provided at a position where it is easy to win when the first special variable winning ball device 20a is closed. For example, the game ball is arranged by the nail arrangement around the first special variable winning ball device 20a. It may be provided at a position where it can be easily guided.

An ordinary symbol display 10 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 6. The ordinary symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, "○" and "x") called ordinary symbols.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbol becomes visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp lights at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. .. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14). Changes to. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of lit indicators by 1. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by 1. Further, in the probabilistic state in which the probability of being decided to be a big hit is higher than in the normal state, the probability that the stopped symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball device 15 The opening time becomes longer and the number of opening times is increased. That is, the high base state, which is a game state controlled so that the game ball is easy to start and win a prize (that is, the execution condition of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easy to be satisfied). Transition. Further, in this embodiment, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased and the number of times of opening is increased even in the time saving state (the gaming state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened).

In addition, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the process shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if the normal symbol probabilistic state is entered, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning is easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 10 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started more frequently, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol is higher. Therefore, as the frequency with which the normal symbol hits increases, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases, and the starting prize is easily won (high base state).

In addition, by shifting to a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, the variation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that an effective start prize is likely to occur. The possibility that a big hit game will be played increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a starting prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state).

Decorative LEDs 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27R and 27L for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame LEDs 28a, left frame LEDs 28b, and right frame LEDs 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball LED 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame LED 28b, and a ball burnout LED 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame LED 28c. .. The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decorative LED 25 are examples of light emitting bodies for effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-mentioned various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 5 and launches the game ball into the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first (1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and starts. (The condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine as viewed from the back surface. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface side of the pachinko game machine 1, a variable display control unit including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer 100 for controlling an effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like are provided. Various boards such as a game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for ball payout control is mounted are installed. There is. The game control board 31 is housed in the board storage case 200.

Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply board 910 and a touch sensor board 91 on which power supply circuits for creating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted are provided. The power supply board 910 is supplied with the game control board 31 of the pachinko game machine 1, each electric component control board (effect control board 80 and payout control board 37), and each electric component (electric power is supplied) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A power switch as a power supply permission means for executing or cutting off the power supply to (parts that operate by the operation) and a clear switch for clearing the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 of the game control board 31 are provided. ing. Further, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (on the inside of the board). In this embodiment, the case where the clear switch is provided on the power supply board 910 is described, but the installation location of the clear switch is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, it may be provided on a board other than the power supply board 910, such as the game control board 31 and the payout control board 37.

Each control board is equipped with a control means including a control microcomputer. The control means is an electric component (game device: ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, lamp, LED, etc.) provided in the game machine according to a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. The body, the speaker 27, etc.) are controlled. Hereinafter, the description may be made by including the main board 31 in the control board. In that case, the control means mounted on the control board refers to each of the game control means and the means for controlling the electric components provided in the game machine according to the command signal from the game control means or the like. Further, a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub board. The ball payout device 97 is a device for paying out a game ball guided by a passage for guiding the game ball and a sprocket or the like driven by a stepping motor or the like to an upper plate or a lower plate. A payout quantity count switch for counting prize balls and rental balls is also configured as a part of the unit.

On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 160 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. On the terminal board 160, for example, information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (starting port signal shown in FIG. 35, symbol confirmation count 1 signal, symbol confirmation count 2 signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal) , 3 jackpot signals, time saving signal, security signal, high accuracy middle signal, prize ball signal 1, game machine error status signal) are provided with an information output terminal for external output.

In this embodiment, the case where the terminal board 160 is provided above the back surface on the game frame side is shown, but the method of arranging the terminal board 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, by providing a back cover on the back side of the variation display control unit including the effect control board 80 and mounting the terminal board 160 on the back cover, the terminal board 160 may be arranged on the game board side. Good.

The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through an induction rail (not shown), passes through a curved gutter, and reaches the ball payout device 97 covered with the payout case 40A. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball out switch 187 is provided as a game medium outage detecting means. When the ball out switch 187 detects that the ball is out, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 is stopped. The ball-out switch 187 is a switch that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball-out detection switch 167 that detects the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the induction rail (in the storage tank 38). It is provided in the adjacent part). When the ball out detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the replenishment mechanism provided on the island where the game machine is installed replenishes the pachinko game machine 1.

When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning prizes and game balls based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hit ball supply plate 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball tray 4 through the surplus ball guidance passage. Further, when the game ball is paid out, the sensing lever (not shown) presses the full tank switch as the storage state detecting means, and the full tank switch as the storage state detecting means is turned on. In that state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the drive of the ball launching device is also stopped.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start is generated at a random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the time when the winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data.

The random number circuit 503 has a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection function. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random number can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as ROM 54 (ID number assigned by a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained above is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

The game control microcomputer 560 reads numerical data as a random number R from the random number circuit 503 when a start prize is generated for the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, and starts changing the special symbol and the effect symbol. Sometimes, based on the random number R, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result, that is, whether or not to make a big hit. Then, when it is decided to make a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the total pending storage number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The power supply board is equipped with a reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to a game control microcomputer 560 or the like. When the reset signal reaches a high level, the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes a low level, the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is in an operation stopped state. Therefore, during the period when the reset signal is at a high level, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output, and during the period when the reset signal is at a low level, the game control microcomputer is output. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the 560 or the like is output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling electric components is mounted).

Further, a power cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, when the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the game machine is monitored on the power supply board and the voltage value drops to a predetermined predetermined value (power supply voltage drops). When detected), a power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power supply cutoff signal to that effect is installed. Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM has been operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

Further, the detection signals from the combined operation switch 33a, the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21a that opens and closes the first special variable winning ball device 20a that forms the first special winning opening, and a second special variable winning ball device that forms the second special winning opening. An output circuit 59 that drives the solenoid 21b that opens and closes the 20b according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

Further, an information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. It receives the effect control command and controls the display with the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decorative LED 25, the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. At the same time, the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the audio output board 70.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

Further, the RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part of the RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100 is provided for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). The contents are saved. In particular, at least data indicating the game state (probability change state flag and time saving state flag, which will be described later) is stored in the backup RAM. However, in this embodiment, the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the time reduction state transition, which will be described later, is not stored in the backup RAM.

In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including an effect symbol) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port portion 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decorative LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitting body other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitting body is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of allocation of output ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 5, the payout control signal (connection signal in this example) transmitted to the payout control board 37 is output from the output port 0. In addition, the first special variable winning ball device 20a for opening and closing the large winning opening, the solenoids (large winning opening door solenoid) 21a and 21b for opening and closing the second special variable winning ball device 20b, and the variable winning ball device 15 are opened and closed. A drive signal for the solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 16 for the operation is also output from the output port 0. Further, among the signals output from the output port 0 to the external device (for example, a hall computer) via the terminal board 160, the high-accuracy medium signal is also output.

The logic opposite to the "logic" shown in FIG. 5 (for example, 1 is on) (for example, 0 is on) may be used, but in particular, for the connection signal, the main board 31 and the payout control board are used. "Logic" is defined so that the payout control microcomputer 370 always detects the off state when the signal line between the signal line and the 37 is disconnected or the cable is disconnected (including the cable is not connected). .. Specifically, in general, when a disconnection or cable disconnection occurs, a high level is detected on the signal receiving side, so that the high level on the signal line between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is the game control means. "Logic" is defined so that it is turned off at the output port in. Therefore, if necessary, an output buffer circuit that logically inverts the signal is installed outside the output port on the main board 31.

Then, from the output port 1, via the terminal board 160, various information output signals, that is, information related to control (for example, start port signal, symbol confirmation count 1 signal, symbol) are transmitted to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The output data of the fixed number of times 2 signals, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signals, jackpot 3 signals, time saving signal, security signal) is output. However, as already described, among the signals output externally, the high-accuracy medium signal is output from the output port 0. In this embodiment, the prize ball signal 1 (a signal output each time one prize ball payout is detected) and the game machine error state signal (the game machine is in an error state (in this example, the ball is out)), which will be described later. A signal indicating that an error state or a full tank error state) is also output to an external device via the terminal board 160. In this case, the payout control board 37 side detects the prize ball payout and the error state of the game machine, and the prize ball signal 1 and the game machine error state signal are input to the main board 31. Then, the prize ball signal 1 and the game machine error status signal input to the main board 31 are output to the outside via the terminal board 160 as they are on the main board 31 without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. Will be done. The prize ball signal 1 and the game machine error status signal input to the main board 31 may be output to the outside via the terminal board 160 after once passing through the game control microcomputer 560.

The signal output externally via the terminal board 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a door opening signal indicating that the game frame is in the open state may also be output to an external device via the terminal board 160. Further, for example, in this embodiment, the case where the prize ball signal 1 output every time one prize ball payout is detected is output externally, but instead of the prize ball signal 1, the prize is awarded. The prize ball information output every time 10 balls are paid out may be output to an external device via the terminal board 160. In this case, on the payout control board 37 side, it is detected that the game frame is open and the prize ball is paid out, and the door opening signal and the prize ball information are input to the main board 31. Then, the door opening signal and the prize ball information input to the main board 31 are output to the outside via the terminal board 160 as they are on the main board 31 without passing through the game control microcomputer 560. However, it is assumed that the door opening signal and the prize ball information are branched on the main board 31 and input to the game control microcomputer 560. In this case as well, the door opening signal and the prize ball information input to the main board 31 may be output to the outside via the terminal board 160 after once passing through the game control microcomputer 560. ..

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of an input port in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 6, bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 have a first count switch 23a, a second count switch 23b, a gate switch 32a, a combined operation switch 33a, a magnet sensor signal 1, and a magnet sensor signal, respectively. 2. Door opening signal and prize ball information are input. In this embodiment, two magnet sensors (not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity using magnets are provided, and detection signals from the respective magnet sensors are also input from the input port 0. .. Further, the detection signal of the first start port switch 13a is input to bit 0 of the input port 1. Further, the detection signal of the second start port switch 14a is input to bit 1 of the input port 1. Further, the detection signal of the winning confirmation switch 14b is input to the bit 2 of the input port 1. Further, the clear switch from the power supply board 910 and the detection signal of the power supply cutoff signal are input to the bits 3 and 4 of the input port 1, respectively.

FIG. 7 is a circuit diagram showing the internal configuration of the terminal board 160. In the terminal board 160 shown in FIG. 7, the connectors CN-1 and CN-2 on the upper left side are connectors for connecting the cables for transmitting signals from the main board 31, and the connectors CN1-3 on the lower left side are. This is a connector for connecting a cable that transmits a signal from the payout control board 37 via the main board 31. Further, the connectors CN1 to CN11 on the right side are connectors for connecting a cable for transmitting a signal to an external device such as a hall computer. Further, semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC11 as a driver circuit are mounted on the terminal board 160.

By connecting the cables from the main board 31 to the connectors CN-1 and CN-2, various signals are input to the terminal board 160 from the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560). Specifically, a start port signal is input to the terminal "2" of the connector CN-1, a signal of 1 symbol determination count is input to the terminal "3" of the connector CN-1, and the terminal "4" of the connector CN-1 is input. 2 signals for the number of symbol confirmations are input to, 1 jackpot signal is input to the terminal "5" of the connector CN-1, 2 jackpot signals are input to the terminal "6" of the connector CN-1, and the terminal of the connector CN-1. Three jackpot signals are input to "7", a time saving signal is input to the terminal "8" of the connector CN-1, a security signal is input to the terminal "9" of the connector CN-1, and the terminal of the connector CN-2. A high-accuracy middle signal is input to "9".

Further, by connecting the cable from the payout control board 37 to the connector CN-3 via the main board 31, various signals from the payout control board 37 (microcomputer 370 for payout control) are input to the terminal board 160. Will be done. Specifically, the prize ball signal 1 is input to the terminal "2" of the connector CN-3, and the game machine error status signal is input to the terminal "3" of the connector CN-3.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the terminal board 160, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the terminal "1" of the connector CN-1, the connector CN-2, and the connector CN-3, and the signal line is branched, and each of them is branched. It is connected to the input terminal "1" of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11. The signal lines connected to the terminals "2" to "9" of the connector CN-1, the terminals "9" of the connector CN-2, and the connectors "2" and "3" of the connector CN-3 are 1 KΩ, respectively. It is connected to the input terminal "2" of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 via the resistors R1 to R11. Further, the signal lines connected to the output terminals "4" of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are connected to the terminals "1" of the connectors CN1 to CN11, respectively. Further, the signal lines connected to the output terminals "3" of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are connected to the terminals "2" of the connectors CN1 to CN11, respectively.

In the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11, when a signal current flows through the input terminal, the light emitting element (LED) on the input side emits light. The emitted light is applied to a photoelectric element (solar cell) provided opposite to the LED through transparent silicon. The photoelectric element that receives the light exchanges for a voltage according to the amount of light, and this voltage charges the MOSFET gate of the output unit through the control circuit. When the MOSFET gate voltage supplied from the photoelectric element reaches the set voltage value, the MOSFET becomes conductive and the load is turned on. When the signal current of the input terminal is cut off, the light emitting element (LED) stops emitting light. When the LED stops emitting light, the voltage of the photoelectric element drops, and when the voltage supplied from the photoelectric element drops, the control circuit rapidly discharges the gate load of the MOSFET. This control circuit puts the MOSFET in a non-conducting state and turns off the load.

By the operation of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 as described above, the signals input from the connector CN-1, the connector CN-2 and the connector CN-3 on the input side are transmitted to the connectors CN1 to CN11 on the output side, and the hall computer or the like Output to an external device. Specifically, the start port signal is output from the connector CN1, the symbol confirmation number 1 signal is output from the connector CN2, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is output from the connector CN3, the jackpot 1 signal is output from the connector CN4, and the connector. 2 jackpot signals are output from CN5, 3 jackpot signals are output from connector CN6, time saving signal is output from connector CN7, security signal is output from connector CN8, high accuracy medium signal is output from connector CN9, and connector. The prize ball signal 1 is output from the CN10, and the game machine error status signal is output from the connector CN11. The connector assignment for each external output signal on the terminal board 160 is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the security signal may be output from the endmost connector (for example, connector CN11) provided on the terminal board 160.

The security signal output from the connector CN8 is a signal indicating the security status of the game machine. Specifically, as will be described later, when it is determined that an abnormal winning of the second starting winning opening 14 has occurred based on the detection result of the second starting opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b. In addition, a security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). With such a configuration, a hall computer or the like recognizes that a fraudulent act has been performed using radio waves or the like to make the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening 14 recognized to be larger than the actual number of winnings. It can be recognized by the external device side of.

Further, in this embodiment, a security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) even when the power is turned on to the game machine and the initialization process is executed. .. By configuring in such a way, it is recognized that the initialization process is executed at an unnatural timing (for example, even after the power reset work of all the game machines is completed at the time of opening the game store). By making it possible, it is possible for an external device such as a hall computer to recognize the possibility that a fraudulent act such as illegally resetting the power of the game machine and aiming for a big hit at the timing of the power reset can be recognized. it can.

In this embodiment, as described above, the RAM 55 is based on the case where an abnormal winning is detected and the initialization process (for example, when the power is turned on to the game machine, the operation by the clear switch is performed). A common security signal is output externally from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 when the processing (such as clearing the stored contents) is executed. This is because the initialization process is usually executed only when the power of the game machine is reset when the game store opens, so the terminal is for signals that are output only about once a day. Providing a dedicated connector or semiconductor relay on the substrate 160 is not efficient and wasteful. Therefore, in this embodiment, a signal for external output is output by configuring the security signal to be output from the common connector CN8 depending on whether the abnormal winning is detected or the initialization process is executed. The waste of wires and circuit elements is reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of parts of the mechanism for outputting information to an external device such as a hall computer and complicated wiring work.

The signal externally output from the common connector as a security signal is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, not only the abnormal winning of the second starting winning opening 14 but also the abnormal winning of the large winning opening and the first starting winning opening 13 can be detected and output externally as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. It may be configured as follows. In this case, for example, the large winning opening and the first starting winning opening 13 also have two types of switches (proximity switches) having different detection methods as switches for detecting the winning of the game ball, similarly to the second starting winning opening 14. And a photo sensor), and the presence or absence of abnormal winning may be determined according to the same determination method as that of the second starting winning opening 14.

Further, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in the game machine or when an abnormal radio wave is detected by a radio wave sensor provided in the game machine, it is used as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. It may be configured so that it can be output externally. Further, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in the game machine is detected (for example, when a short circuit or the like is detected because it is determined that the input value exceeds the threshold value), the terminal board 160 is common. It may be configured so that it can be output externally as a security signal from the connector CN8.

As described above, it is possible to externally output an abnormal prize to the large winning opening, an abnormal winning to the first starting winning opening 13, an abnormal magnetic error, and an abnormal radio wave error as a security signal from the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable error detection by an external device such as a hall computer by connecting only one signal line, and it is possible to reduce the work load related to error detection.

When detecting an abnormal winning in the large winning opening, the number of detections by the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b and the number of detections by the winning confirmation switch are equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 10). In addition to the case where the judgment is made based on the fact, when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a value indicating that the jackpot game is in progress (for example, when the value of the special symbol process flag is not 5 or more. (See FIG. 17), even when a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b, it may be determined that an abnormal winning is generated in the large winning opening. Further, in this way, when it is determined that an abnormal winning is generated in the large winning opening based on the detection results of the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 23b, and the winning confirmation switch, or the value of the special symbol process flag is set. Even if it is determined that an abnormal prize has occurred in the large winning opening, the security signal information timer can be set to a predetermined time (for example, 4 minutes) in the same manner as in step S2127 in the switch normal / abnormality check process. , The security signal may be output externally.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of detections by the second start opening switch 14a and the number of detections by the winning confirmation switch 14b are equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 10), and the second start winning opening 14 is subjected to. The case where it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred and a security signal is output to the outside is shown. For example, the value of the normal symbol process flag used in the normal symbol process processing is that the variable winning ball device 15 is being opened. When the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 14a when the value is not the indicated value, it is determined that an abnormal winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and a security signal is output externally. May be good.

In addition to the signal line for security signal output, detection of initialization processing execution, detection of abnormal winning in the first starting winning opening 13, detection of abnormal winning in the second starting winning opening 14, and large winning opening Separate signal lines are provided for detection of abnormal prizes, abnormal magnetic errors, and abnormal radio wave errors, and from the terminal board 160, along with security signals, external output signals corresponding to each error are also provided. It may be output to an external device such as a hall computer. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some kind of error has occurred by checking the security signal, and further, by checking the signal output for each type of error, the game store can determine the type of error. You can check. Therefore, if the amusement store requests confirmation of the error type, an external output signal for each error type is provided in addition to the security signal to provide an external output that better meets the needs of the amusement store. You can make it possible. On the other hand, in the case of a game store that only requests confirmation that some kind of error has occurred, only the security signal among the externally output signals is connected to an external device such as a hall computer. You just have to check.

By providing the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 on the terminal board 160 as described above, it is possible to prevent signal input from the outside to the inside of the game machine, and as a result, fraudulent activity can be reliably prevented. In the above example, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11 are provided on the terminal board 160, but instead of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC11, other relay elements such as a mechanical relay may be used.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs game state restoration processing (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S13a. In this embodiment, in the process of step S43, the CPU 56 also transmits a total hold storage number designation command for setting the value of the total hold storage number counter stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. ..

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 detects an abnormality in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening when the power is turned on, and executes a large winning opening abnormality notification process when the power is turned on to notify the large winning opening abnormality (step S13a). ).

In addition, "abnormal grand prize opening" means that the game ball has abnormally won a prize in the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening (specifically, the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening is open). The game ball was detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b when it was not controlled by.). In this embodiment, as described above, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are alternately controlled to be open. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b when not in the big hit game state, or even in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening is closed. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a when the state is controlled, or when the second big winning opening is controlled to the closed state, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 23a. In this case, a large winning opening abnormality is detected, and control is performed to notify the large winning opening abnormality. In addition, between the time when the game ball wins the first prize opening or the second big prize opening and the time when it is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b, the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening Since it is assumed that the mouth is controlled to be closed, the first count switch 23a or the second count switch is used after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first prize opening or the second prize opening was controlled to be closed. When the game ball is detected by 23b, it may be determined that a large winning opening abnormality has occurred and the game ball may be detected.

In step S13a, since the jackpot game state is not controlled when the power is turned on, the CPU 56 causes a big winning opening abnormality if the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b. Judge that it was done. Then, when notifying the big winning opening abnormality, for example, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) in the security signal information timer. In this embodiment, the security signal is output for a predetermined time (30 in this example) by executing the information output process (see S30) based on the fact that the security signal information timer is set to the predetermined time in step S13a. Seconds) Output to the outside. Further, for example, the CPU 56 may be controlled to transmit a large winning opening abnormality notification designation command for notifying the large winning opening abnormality to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 that has received the large winning opening abnormality notification designation command controls, for example, to display a screen indicating that a large winning opening abnormality has occurred on the effect display device 9. Notify the winning opening abnormality.

Further, in step S13a, unlike the large winning opening abnormality notification process (step S21a) in the timer interrupt processing described later, the CPU 56 has a large winning opening abnormality in either the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening. Notify so that it can be identified whether it has occurred. Specifically, if the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the CPU 56 controls to perform the above-mentioned notification, and for example, a specific lamp (for example, a large winning opening abnormality at the first large winning opening) occurs. A control for turning on a lamp (not shown in FIG. 1 or the like) provided for notifying that an occurrence has occurred (for example, a control for displaying a specific screen on the effect display device 9 or a specific sound from the speaker 27). Control to output) is performed. By controlling in this way, it is possible to identify which large winning opening has an abnormality only when the power is turned on. Therefore, for example, when checking the operation of each device at the shipping stage of the game machine. , It is possible to confirm whether the abnormality determination of both the first prize opening and the second prize opening is made normally. In this embodiment, in the large winning opening abnormality notification process (step S21a) in the timer interrupt processing described later, which of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening has an abnormality? Is not notified so that it can be identified, but it may be provided.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random number R, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 2 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed by using the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by lottery using random numbers. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the control of the reach effect.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal is output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined. (Switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 detects an abnormality in the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening, and executes a large winning opening abnormality notification process for notifying the large winning opening abnormality (step S21a).

In step S21a, the CPU 56 detects when the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a in a state where the first special winning opening opening flag indicating that the first winning opening is open is not set, or A big winning opening abnormality occurred when a game ball was detected by the second count switch 23b in a state where the second winning opening opening flag indicating that the second winning opening was open was not set. Judge. Then, when notifying the big winning opening abnormality, for example, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) in the security signal information timer. In this embodiment, the security signal is output for a predetermined time (30 in this example) by executing the information output process (see S30) based on the fact that the security signal information timer is set to the predetermined time in step S21a. Seconds) Output to the outside. Further, for example, the CPU 56 may be controlled to transmit a large winning opening abnormality notification designation command for notifying the large winning opening abnormality to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 that has received the large winning opening abnormality notification designation command controls, for example, to display a screen indicating that a large winning opening abnormality has occurred on the effect display device 9. Notify the winning opening abnormality. In addition, between the time when the game ball wins the first prize opening or the second big prize opening and the time when it is detected by the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 23b, the first big prize opening or the second big prize Since it is assumed that the mouth is controlled to be closed, the first count switch 23a or the second count is reached after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first prize opening opening flag or the second winning opening opening flag was reset. When the game ball is detected by the switch 23b, it may be determined that a large winning opening abnormality has occurred and the game ball may be detected.

In this embodiment, in order to make the notification method of the large winning opening abnormality different between when the power is turned on and at other timings, the large winning opening abnormality notification process (step S13a) at the time of turning on the power is executed in the main process. , The large winning opening abnormality notification process (step S21a) is executed in the timer interrupt process. For example, the large winning opening abnormality notification process when the main process is turned on is omitted, and the power is turned on when the power is turned on. If the power-on flag is set to indicate that the power is on, and the power-on flag is set when a large prize-winning port abnormality occurs in the large-winning port abnormality notification process of the timer interrupt process, the first A notification is sent so that it is possible to identify which of the 1st and 2nd big prize openings has an abnormality, and the power-on flag is reset and the power-on flag is set. If not, it may be configured to notify that a big winning opening abnormality has occurred. Further, for example, the large winning opening abnormality notification process when the power is turned on in the main process is omitted, and when a large winning opening abnormality occurs in the large winning opening abnormality notification process of the timer interrupt process, the large winning opening abnormality is already notified. If the abnormality notification flag indicating that the above is performed more than once is not set, it is possible to identify whether the first prize opening or the second prize opening is abnormal. If the abnormality notification flag is set, the abnormality notification flag may be set, and if the abnormality notification flag is set, it may be configured to notify that a big winning opening abnormality has occurred.

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, a special symbol process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the large winning opening (the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening) in a predetermined order. Execute the corresponding process according to the flag. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 data such as a start port signal, a symbol confirmation number 1 signal, a symbol confirmation number 2 signal, a jackpot 1-3 signal, a time saving signal, a security signal, and a high accuracy medium signal supplied to a hall management computer, for example. Is performed (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b ( Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 23b being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the on-board payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32). For example, when the start flag set in the special symbol process processing is set, the CPU 56 waits until the end flag is set, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, every 0.2 seconds elapse. The value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the first special symbol and the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b The variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach state may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally off") variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "out of reach".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9.

When the small hit "5" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "sudden probability change big hit" in the effect display device 9. After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability change big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol "5" on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a variable display mode of "small hit". ..

Here, the small hit is allowed up to the number of times the large winning opening is opened less than in the case of the above-mentioned probability variation big hit and the normal big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It's a hit. When the small hit game is completed, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probabilistic state. Further, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to the number of times that the big winning opening is opened a small number of times in the big hit game state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely long. A short jackpot and a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probabilistic state. Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By controlling in this way, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is not possible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so it is a high probability state for the player. (Probability change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, when a sudden big hit or a small hit suddenly occurs, the opening time per one is shortened and the number of times the big winning opening is opened is reduced as compared with the normal big hit and the probable big hit. I made it. Not limited to this, in the case of a sudden big hit or a small hit, at least the number of winning balls to the big winning opening may be smaller than that of the normal big hit or the probable big hit. For example, in the case of sudden change big hits and small hits, either the opening time per one time is shortened or the number of times the big winning opening is opened is reduced as compared with the normal big hit and the probability change big hit. Only one of them may be executed.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, shortened non-reach loss and non-reach loss are provided as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is not accompanied by the reach state. Is prepared. In addition, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is accompanied by a reach state, normal deviation, pseudo-ream 1 normal deviation, super-disengagement, pseudo-ream 2 super-disengagement, and pseudo-ream 3 Super outliers are available. As shown in FIG. 10, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the pseudo-ream 1 normal deviation is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the pseudo-ream 2 super deviation is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the pseudo-ream 3 super deviation is used, the re-variation is performed three times. The re-variation is to temporarily stop the effect symbol that is temporarily out of alignment from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then re-execute the variable display of the effect symbol. When re-variating, the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol that appears only in the pseudo-ream that is not in the arrangement of the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped. Further, among the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10, the shortened non-reach loss is a variation pattern for shortening in which the fluctuation time is shorter than that of the non-reach loss, which is provided in response to the non-reach loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, normal hit, pseudo-ream 1 per, super-ream, pseudo-ream 2 super hits and pseudo-ream 3 super hits are available. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the pseudo-ream per normal is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the pseudo-ream 2 super hit is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the pseudo-ream 3 super hit is used, the re-variation is performed three times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, a special hit is prepared as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of the special symbol suddenly becomes a probabilistic big hit or a small hit.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach with pseudo-ream (3 times), it varies. The time is fixed at 40 seconds, and the fluctuation time is fixed at 25 seconds in the case of super reach without pseudo-ream), but for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, the total The fluctuation time may be different depending on the number of reserved storages. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the fluctuation time may be shortened as the total number of reserved storages increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed, the fluctuation time may be different according to the first reserved storage number. 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the variable time may be made different according to the second reserved storage number. In this case, separate tables are prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number (for example, the fluctuation pattern determination table for the reserved storage number 0 to 2 and the reserved storage number 3 and 4 are used. A fluctuation pattern determination table may be prepared), and the determination table may be selected according to the value of the first hold storage number or the second hold storage number so that the fluctuation time is different.

Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time is configured to be different depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (in the example shown in FIG. 10, when the time saving state is used). The judgment value is set so that the ratio of selecting "shortened non-reach out", which has a shorter fluctuation time than other fluctuation patterns, is high), and not limited to this, the normal state (or time saving state). However, the fluctuation time may be different (that is, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern with the short fluctuation time is selected is different) depending on the total number of reserved storages. For example, as the total number of reserved storages increases, the fluctuation time may become shorter (that is, the ratio of selection of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times increases). Further, for example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed, the fluctuation time is different according to the first reserved storage number (that is, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected is different). However, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the variation time is made different according to the second reserved storage number (that is, the rate at which the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected is made different). You may do so. In this case, separate tables are prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number (for example, the fluctuation pattern determination table for the reserved storage number 0 to 2 and the reserved storage number 3 and 4 are used. A fluctuation pattern determination table may be prepared), and the determination table may be selected according to the value of the first hold storage number or the second hold storage number so that the fluctuation time is different.

When it is configured to use different variation pattern determination tables according to the number of pending storages, for example, the variation pattern determination table used when the display result is out of alignment and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is the total pending. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of reach (normal reach, super reach) is smaller than that of the fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of stored items is 0 to 2. Further, in the fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the judgment value is such that the ratio of selecting "shortened non-reach out", which has a shorter fluctuation time than other fluctuation patterns, is high. Is set. As a result, the average fluctuation time can be shortened as the total number of reserved storages increases, and the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display decreases can be prevented as much as possible.

Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table used when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more and the fluctuation pattern determination table used when the total number of reserved storages is 0 to 2 are specific effects (for example, super reach). A common determination value (eg, 950 to 997) is assigned to the variation pattern (or set of such variation patterns) accompanied by). Therefore, regardless of the total number of pending storages (that is, even if the fluctuation pattern judgment table used is different), a specific effect (that is, even if the value of the extracted fluctuation pattern type judgment random number (random 2) is confirmed at the time of starting winning is required. For example, it can be easily determined in advance whether or not it is accompanied by super reach). Therefore, it is possible to notify that a specific effect (for example, super reach) is accompanied before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize (for example, an effect control command indicating that effect is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. It is realized by executing an effect such as a look-ahead effect on the effect control microcomputer 100 that has been transmitted and received the effect control command), and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, although the case where the allocation of the judgment value is different is shown for two types of the total number of reserved storages being 0 to 2 or 3 or more, the case is not limited to this, and for example, depending on the total number of reserved storages. The allocation may be changed in more detailed steps. In this case, for example, a variation pattern determination table for the total number of reserved storages of 0 and 1, and a variation pattern determination table for the total number of pending storages of 2, 3, the total pending storages, and 4 total pending storages. May be prepared in advance, and the determination value may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern with reach or the fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation, and the values may be different in stages.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): The type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) is determined (for determining the jackpot type).

(2) Random 3 (MR3): The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern).

(3) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).

(4) Random 5 (MR5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be any fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern determination table by using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3).

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 9, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the big hit type determination random number (1) and the ordinary symbol hit determination random number (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display (random number 3) or random numbers for initial value (random number 5). In addition, random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in this embodiment, as the big hit determination random number, a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (may be external hardware of the game control microcomputer 560) is used.

FIG. 12A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state. Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 12 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 12A is the jackpot determination value.

12 (B) and 12 (C) are explanatory views showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol and a small hit determination table used when displaying the variation of the second special symbol. (For the second special design) Each numerical value shown in FIG. 12 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is shown in FIG. 12 (C). Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are small hit determination values.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 12 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for big hit determination matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. The "probability" shown in FIG. 12A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as "small hit" is high.

12 (D) and 12 (E) are explanatory views showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Of these, FIG. 12 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a of the case. Further, FIG. 12 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b set the jackpot type to "normal jackpot" or "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining either "probability change jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), 10 determination values are assigned to the “sudden probability change jackpot” in the jackpot type determination table 131a (40 minutes). The jackpot type determination table 131b is assigned three judgment values for the "sudden probability variation jackpot" (three-fortyths of the percentage). (Suddenly determined to be a probabilistic jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is entered and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed, the rate of being determined as "sudden probability change jackpot" is high. It should be noted that the "sudden probability change jackpot" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability variation jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (that is, , "Sudden probability change jackpot" may be determined only when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). It should be noted that the determination values set in the table are different in number and cannot be duplicated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), as the first specific gaming state in which a predetermined amount of game value is given, two rounds of sudden probability change jackpots and more than the game value. A case where a 15-round jackpot (probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot) is determined as the second specific gaming state for giving a quantity of game value will be described, but when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first is 1 Although the case where it is decided to set the specific game state is shown, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the number of winnings (count number) of the game ball to the large winning opening per round is determined as the game value as compared with the first specific game state is determined. May be good. Further, for example, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the big winning opening during the big hit is lengthened as compared with the first specific game state may be determined. Further, for example, even in the same 15-round big hit, the first specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened once per round and the second specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened a plurality of times per round. It may be prepared and the game value of the second specific game state may be increased by substantially increasing the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in either the first specific game state or the second specific game state, when the large winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific game state). In the case of the second specific game state, an undigested round remains), and an effect of a mode that encourages whether or not the jackpot continues further may be executed. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, all 15 rounds are internally completed, so the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, undigested rounds remain internally. Therefore, the jackpot game may be continued (a production in which the opening of the jackpot is additionally started with a bonus after the jackpot of 15 times opening is completed).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the jackpot types include "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot".

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability change state and also in the time saving state. Migrate. See steps S170 and S171 described later). Then, after shifting to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

Further, the "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds, does not shift to the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and shifts only to the time saving state (see step S167 described later). .. Then, after shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, even if a big hit occurs after the transition to the time saving state and before the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times is completed, the time saving state ends (see step S134 described later).

Further, the "sudden change jackpot" is allowed up to the number of times that the big prize opening is opened less than the "probability change jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit to be done. That is, in the case of "sudden probability change big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds. Then, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state of the two rounds, the state is shifted to the probabilistic state (in this embodiment, the probabilistic state is shifted and the time is shortened as well. Step S170 described later. , S171). Then, after shifting to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

As described above, in this embodiment, even when a "small hit" is obtained, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit game state due to the "sudden probability change big hit" is obtained. Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of a "small hit", the gaming state does not change after the two opening of the big winning opening is completed, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained (described later). (See steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden change big hit" or a "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved.

The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and are judgment values corresponding to each of "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" (big hit type judgment value). ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. The variation pattern determination table is a table that is referred to to determine the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern according to the jackpot type and the game state. is there. When the extracted random 3 (1 to 997) values match the data (judgment value) assigned to each fluctuation pattern, the CPU 56 changes the fluctuation pattern into a pattern corresponding to the judgment value of the matching fluctuation pattern. decide. In the example shown in FIG. 13, the ratio of the determination values assigned to each fluctuation pattern is shown. For example, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (the "off" field in FIG. 13), the determination value corresponding to the random 3 value (1-997) is used. 50% of them are set to the fluctuation pattern "non-reach out". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 13, for each value set in the fluctuation pattern determination table, the variable display result is "missing", "missing (time saving)", "normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot" or "sudden probability variation jackpot /". In the case of "small hit", the ratio determined by the associated fluctuation pattern is shown.

As shown in FIG. 13, for example, when it is determined that the variable display result is "off" in the normal gaming state (the "off" field in FIG. 13), among the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, The rate of being judged as "non-reach off" is the highest, and the rate of being judged as "pseudo-ream 3 super off" is the lowest. Further, for example, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (the "off (time saving)" field in FIG. 13), unlike the "off" field, "non" Judgment values are assigned so that the proportion of "out of reach" is not determined and the proportion of "out of reach" is increased. By setting in this way, it becomes easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

Further, in the case where it is determined that the variable display result is set to "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot" ("normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot" field in FIG. 13), among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. , The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of "per pseudo-ream 3 super" is the highest and the ratio of "per pseudo-ream 1 normal" is the lowest. That is, in the "normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot" field, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern with the pseudo-ream effect, whichever has the larger number of pseudo-reams. Therefore, in the pseudo-ream effect, the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the fluctuation pattern with normal reach (out of normal, out of pseudo-ream 1 normal, per normal and per per normal in pseudo-ream) has a fluctuation pattern with super reach (out of super, out of pseudo-ream 2 super). , Pseudo-ream 3 super off, super-hit, pseudo-ream 2 super-per and pseudo-ream 3 super-per), the variable display result is more likely to be selected as "missing". On the contrary, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (super off, pseudo-ream 2 super off, pseudo-ream 3 super off, super hit, pseudo-ream 2 super per and pseudo-ream 3 super per) is the fluctuation pattern with normal reach (normal out of normal). , Pseudo-ream 1 normal off, normal hit and pseudo-ream 1 normal per), it is easier to select when the variable display result is "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot". Therefore, in this embodiment, it is highly expected that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable pattern with super reach than in the variable pattern with normal reach.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13, when it is determined that the variable display result is set to "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" ("sudden probability change big hit / small hit" field in FIG. 13), The fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "special hit".

14 and 15 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 10 is given a unique number, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, it ends the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is restarted. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a power failure recovery designation command if the data is saved in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command.

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a winning determination result) indicating the content of the winning determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines which variation pattern is used at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating the fluctuation pattern as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation result command, and the control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the winning determination result designation command. As shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, a value is set in the EXT data according to which fluctuation pattern is determined at the time of starting winning, and a winning determination result designation command is transmitted. For example, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "shortened non-reach out" at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, a command for specifying a winning determination result in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Will be done. Further, for example, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "special hit" at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, a winning determination result specification command in which "13 (H)" is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Will be done. Further, for example, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "shortened non-reach outlier" at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, a winning determination result specification command in which "21 (H)" is set in the EXT data is set. Is sent. Further, for example, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "special hit" at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, a winning determination result specification command in which "23 (H)" is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Will be done.

The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 to A004 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the jackpot game. The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, a sudden probability change jackpot start designation command, and a small hit start designation command according to the type of jackpot. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to send a fanfare designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot start designation when it is a sudden probability change jackpot, but not to send a fanfare designation command when it is a small hit. May be good.

The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the winning opening) indicating the display during the opening of the winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the large winning opening) indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 1 designation command: ending 1 designation command) that displays the jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and specifies that it was a normal jackpot. is there. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command) that displays the jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and specifies that the jackpot has been a probability variation jackpot. is there. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured so that the ending specification command for suddenly probable change big hit end designation is transmitted when the sudden big hit is made, but the ending designation command is not sent when the small hit is made. Good.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a time saving state (not including the probability variation state). The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) for designating that the game state is the probability change state.

The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number designation command) for designating the first hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number designation command) for designating the second hold storage number. "XX" in the command C1XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

The command D101 (H) is an effect control command (command for passing the combined operation gate) for designating that the game ball has passed through the combined operation gate 33 after displaying the jackpot symbol. The command D102 (H) is an effect control command (display command for opening the large winning opening) for designating the display that the large winning opening is open.

The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70 according to the contents shown in FIGS. 14 and 15. To do.

For example, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol each time a start prize is given and the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". It should be noted that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wavy) capture signal (effect control INT signal) instructing the capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of capturing 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special. It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and the effect display is performed according to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts such as the device 9, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, the process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening (the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening) is executed. Will be done. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 has the game ball if the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on, or the game ball is in the second start winning opening 14. If the second starting port switch 14a for detecting that a prize has been won is turned on, that is, if a starting winning prize has occurred to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the start opening switch passing process is performed. Is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any of the processes of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

Display result specification command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

Processing during special symbol change (step S303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to the value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

Special symbol stop processing (step S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, when the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305A (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S308 (9 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

First-time large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305A), large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305B): Executed when the values of the special symbol process flags are 5 and 6, respectively. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process and the large winning opening pre-opening process, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, the counter (for example, the counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening (first large winning opening or the second large winning opening)) is initialized, and the solenoid 21a or the solenoid 21b is driven. Then, the first prize opening or the second prize opening is opened. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (7 in this example). The pre-opening process for the large winning opening is executed for each round after the second round, but the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is executed in the first round. The pre-opening process for the first big prize opening is also the process for starting the big hit game.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the jackpot game state to the effect control microcomputer 100, the process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the jackpot, and the like are performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305B (6 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (8 in this example).

Jackpot end processing (step S307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening (first large winning opening or second large winning opening). Specifically, the counter (for example, the counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening (first large winning opening or the second large winning opening)) is initialized, and the solenoid 21a or the solenoid 21b is driven. Then, the first prize opening or the second prize opening is opened. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S309 (10 (decimal number) in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Small hit opening process (step S309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S308 (9 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310 (11 (decimal number) in this example).

Small hit end process (step S310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 11. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. When the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total pending storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (holding specific area) for storing the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Data indicating "first" is set in the area (step S1215).

In this embodiment, when the first starting port switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts winning a prize in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set. When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the game ball starts and wins in the second start winning opening 14), the data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating "first" when the first start port switch 13a is turned on in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as the data indicating “second”. In this case, if there is no corresponding hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

FIG. 19A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area). As shown in FIG. 19A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Note that FIG. 19A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 19A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total hold storage counter value is secured in the hold specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first winning opening 13 or the first 2 Data indicating that the winning order is "first" or "second" is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 19B) (see FIG. 19B). Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number and random number for jackpot type determination (random 1 and variation pattern determination random number (random 3)) which are software random numbers are extracted and saved. It is stored in the area. Random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are not extracted in the start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It may be extracted at the start. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 has a value from a random number counter for determining a variation pattern for generating a random number for determining the variation pattern (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later. May be extracted directly.

FIG. 19B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to hold storage. As shown in FIG. 19B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation. A random number for pattern determination (random number 3) is stored. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process for determining in advance the variation display result and the variation pattern when the variation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the first hold storage number counter, and then wins a prize based on the determination result of the effect production process at the time of winning. Control is performed to transmit the time determination result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1218).

By executing the process of step S1218, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is in the high probability state or high base state, or whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state). Every time the first start winning opening 13 is started, both the first hold storage number designation command and the winning determination result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. However, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variable display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. For example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it becomes easy to start winning a prize in the second starting winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. Therefore, the second special symbol The variable display may be preferentially executed. In this case, the process of step S1215 can be omitted, and the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) shown in FIG. 19A becomes unnecessary. Further, in this case, the CPU 56 is not in the high base state (when the time saving flag is not set), and on the condition that the big hit game is not in progress, the CPU 56 is at the time of winning based on the start winning prize in the first starting winning opening 13. The effect processing (step S1217) may be performed. That is, if the conditions are not satisfied, the execution of the winning effect processing (step S1217) is restricted, and the look-ahead effect for notifying that the display result of the specific variable display will be a big hit or super reach (for details, see It may not be executed (described later). In a configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, in a gaming state in which the second start winning opening 14 is likely to be started and won, the first special symbol is changed based on the starting winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Since the display may continue to be postponed, there is a possibility that the variable display of the advance notice target may not be easily executed even if the look-ahead effect is executed. However, by restricting the execution of the winning effect processing (step S1217), it is possible to prevent the first start winning opening 13 from executing the look-ahead effect based on the start winning, and such a state can be avoided. be able to. Further, by limiting the effect processing at the time of winning during the high base state or the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a state where it can be recognized that the hold memory that becomes the big hit is stored. Whether or not the jackpot game is in progress is confirmed by, for example, the value of the special symbol process flag. In that case, the CPU 56 determines that the jackpot game is in progress when the value of the special symbol process flag is any of 5 to 8. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 side always performs the effect processing at the time of winning, and the effect control microcomputer 100 side determines whether or not it is in a high base state and whether or not it is in a big hit game. The execution of the look-ahead effect may be restricted. Further, on the game control microcomputer 560 side, when the high base state or the big hit game is in progress, the execution of the winning effect processing (that is, the look-ahead effect) based on the start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 is restricted. In the case of the configuration, on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, only the look-ahead effect based on the start winning in the second start winning opening 14 can be executed in the high base state, and the first start winning opening in the low base state. Only the look-ahead effect based on the start winning in 13 can be executed (that is, in the low base state, the look-ahead effect is performed even if the winning judgment result specification command based on the start winning in the second start winning opening 14 is received. It may not be decided to execute).

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1225). Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating "second" in the area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage number counter in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 24B) (see FIG. 24B). Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3) is not extracted in the start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random number 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect processing (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the second hold storage number counter, and then wins a prize based on the determination result of the effect production process at the time of winning. Control is performed to transmit the time determination result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1229).

By executing the process of step S1229, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is in the high probability state or high base state, or whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state). Every time the second start winning opening 14 is started and won, both the second hold storage number designation command and the winning determination result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1218. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the big hit determination random number (random number R) extracted in steps S126 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 12 (A), and these are It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the big hit type is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation pattern setting processing. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started. By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance which fluctuation pattern will be obtained. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern is predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the production symbol is executed, and as will be described later, a jackpot or a supermarket is performed by the production control microcomputer 100 based on the judgment result at the time of winning. Perform a look-ahead effect that announces that it will reach.

If the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the normal time (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation state is set. Confirm (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S126 and S1227 with the big hit determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. 12 (A), and they are compared. Check if they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S221 and whether or not the variable display is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the gaming state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S221 or not and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the variation start). If a probability change jackpot occurs before, it may change from the normal state to the probability change state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match.

If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 performs the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S126 and S1227 and FIG. 12 (B). ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, if the CPU 56 has a start winning prize in the first starting winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing (see step S1217) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 18), FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in (B). Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing (see step S1228) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 18), FIG. 12 (C) shows. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S224). In this embodiment, in step S224, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state (specifically, whether or not the time saving flag is set). It should be noted that a plurality of variable displays are executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S224 and whether or not the change state or the time saving state is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is a possibility. Therefore, the gaming state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S224 and whether or not the time is shortened, and the time when the variable display based on the starting winning is actually started (for example). , If a probability change jackpot occurs before the start of fluctuation, it may change from the normal state to the probability change state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S224 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match.

Then, the CPU 56 selects a field in the variation pattern determination table according to the determination result in step S224 (step S225). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the probability change state or the time reduction state, the CPU 56 selects the "off (time reduction)" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. If it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state, the "off" field of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 is selected.

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 selects the "sudden probability change big hit / small hit" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. .. (Step S226).

When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S126 and S1227. Is determined (step S227). In this case, if the CPU 56 has a start winning prize in the first starting winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing (see step S1217) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 18), FIG. Using the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in (D), it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot". Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing (see step S1228) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 18), FIG. 12 (E) shows. Using the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown, it is determined whether the big hit type is "normal big hit", "probability change big hit", or "sudden change big hit".

Then, the CPU 56 selects the field of the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type determined in step S227. (Step S228). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that it is a "normal jackpot" or a "probability variation jackpot", it selects the "normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot" field of the variation pattern determination table. If it is determined that "sudden probability change big hit", the "sudden probability change big hit / small hit" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table is selected.

Next, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern using the fields of the variation pattern determination table set in steps S225, S226, and S228 and the variation pattern determination random numbers (random numbers 3) extracted in steps S126 and S1227 (step). S229).

Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the determined variation pattern in the winning determination result designation command (step S230). Specifically, the CPU 56 wins a value of any one of "00 (H)" to "33 (H)" as shown in FIG. 16 depending on which fluctuation pattern is determined in step S229. Performs the process of setting to the EXT data of the time judgment result specification command.

For example, when there is a start winning prize to the first starting winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing (see step S1217A) is executed in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 18), the “non-reach” is performed in step S229. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "off", "02 (H)" (passing the start port switch shown in FIG. 18) is added to the EXT data of the winning determination result specification command composed of MODE data "95 (H)". When the winning effect processing (see step S1217A) is executed in the processing, the processing for setting "22 (H)") is performed. Further, when it is determined in step S229 that the variation pattern type is "per pseudo-ream 3 super", "12 (H)" is added to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data "95 (H)". ) ”(“ 32 (H) ”when executing the winning effect process (see step S1217A) in the start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 18) is performed.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the same fluctuation pattern determination table even if the number of reserved storages is different, but different fluctuation pattern determination tables may be used according to the number of reserved storages. .. In this case, regardless of the number of reserved memories, for example, whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined from the variation pattern determination random number (or the variation pattern type determination random number), and the determination result is determined. The winning judgment result specification command may be transmitted based on this, or it is determined that a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern for performing a specific reach effect, a fluctuation pattern for a specific pseudo-ream number, etc.) is obtained. Occasionally, a winning determination result specification command indicating the determination result may be transmitted. Further, for example, a command that determines whether or not the display result is a "normal jackpot" or a "probability variable jackpot" and indicates the determination result is used as a winning determination result specification command or separately from the winning determination result specification command. You may send it.

21 and 22 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S300 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage counter is checked. If the total number of pending storages is 0, the process ends.

If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the holding specific area (see FIG. 19A) is the data indicating "first". (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "first" (that is, the data indicating the "second") (N in step S52), the CPU 56 uses the special symbol pointer (third). Data indicating "second" is set in the flag) indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the 1 special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S54). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S53). ).

By executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol is changed according to the starting winning order in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The display or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case is shown, the variation display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, when preferentially executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is confirmed in step S52 whether or not the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number buffer is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S54, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step S53.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter, and in the hold specific area and the first hold storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the hold specific area and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted. To do.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Further, the CPU 56 adds up the values (values indicating "first" or "second") stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of pending storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched. Further, the order in which each value stored in each storage area corresponding to each total number of reserved storages is extracted always matches the order of total number of reserved storages = 1 to 8.

In step S56, when the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer is subtracted by 1, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol hold storage display 18a based on the subtracted count value of the hold storage counter. Alternatively, control for changing the display of the second special symbol hold storage display 18b is also performed.

Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total reserved storage counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), and then reduces the value of the total reserved storage by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction. (Step S59). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be standardized between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 56 reads a random number R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for jackpot determination extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 12) with a random number for big hit judgment, and executes a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is probabilistically changed between the probability variation jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 12A in ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 12A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set to be less than the jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the game state or the time saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 12 (A), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, it is decided to be a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot, which is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stopped symbol is stopped and displayed. It will be reset at the timing.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 12B and 12C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 12 (B). ) Is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 12C is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. .. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (E).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to use the type (“normal jackpot”, “probability variation”) corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Sudden probability change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number to determine the jackpot type. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ratio of sudden change jackpots is high.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "sudden probability change jackpot", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, any one of the jackpot symbols "1", "3", and "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly probable jackpot", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when it is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, when the "probability change jackpot" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301 in FIG. 17) (step S76).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S301 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the "normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table when the jackpot type is normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot (Y in step S92). (Step S93), when the jackpot type is not a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot (N in step S92), the "sudden probability variation jackpot / small hit" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 selects the "sudden probability change big hit / small hit" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table (step S96). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S97). The time saving flag is set when the game state is changed to the time saving state (including when the game state is changed to the probability change state), and is reset when the time saving state is finished. Specifically, it is decided to be a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, or a sudden probability variation jackpot, and it is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and the timing when the number of time reductions is exhausted and the change of the special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot It is reset at the timing when the display is finished and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the "off (time saving)" field of the fluctuation pattern determination table (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S97), the CPU 56 selects the “missing” field of the variation pattern determination table (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out random number 3 (random number for determining fluctuation pattern) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer) (step S101), and processes S93, S94, S96, S98 or S99. By referring to the field of the variation pattern determination table selected in step 2, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102).

Next, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

In addition, the variation of the special symbol is started (step S105). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S106). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302 in FIG. 17) (step S107).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302 in FIG. 17). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation production control commands (see FIG. 14) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S110). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, control is performed to transmit the display result 3 designated command (steps S111 and S112). Specifically, whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot can be determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is "02" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing. Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command when the type of the jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot (steps S113 and S114). It should be noted that whether or not the sudden probability change jackpot can be determined can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "03". Then, when it is neither a probabilistic jackpot nor a sudden probabilistic jackpot (that is, when it is a normal jackpot), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 2 designated command (step S115).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when it is off, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S118).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303 in FIG. 17) (step S119).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol change (step S303 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S121), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S122), sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S32. The change of the special symbol is terminated, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b (step S123). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated.

Next, the CUP 56 sets the symbol confirmation time (step S124), controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S125), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag to the special symbol stop process. The value is updated to correspond to (step S304 in FIG. 17) (step S127). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (NO in step S122), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the symbol confirmation time timer (step S131), and when the symbol confirmation time timer times out (YES in step S132), determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step). S133). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S133), the process proceeds to step S140.

When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S133), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot, the jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the jackpot start 2 designation command is sent. If the type of jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot, a sudden probability change jackpot start specification command is sent. Whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, or a sudden probability variation jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). ..

When this jackpot start designation command is transmitted, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays on the effect display device 9 that the combination operation gate 33 is aimed (for example, an arrow indicating the right side of the game area 7). .. When the jackpot display is started by the jackpot start designation command, a small arrow indicating that the winning combination operation gate 33 is aimed at is displayed, and the jackpot display time is timed out in step S383 of FIG. 27, which will be described later. A large arrow indicating that the continuous operation gate 33 is aimed at may be displayed. In this way, after the jackpot display is started, it may be notified that the winning combination operation gate 33 is aimed at. As a result, the player can prepare to aim before the jackpot display time times out and actually aims at the combined operation gate 33.

Further, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying, for example, the effect display device 9 that the occurrence of the jackpot is allowed) in the jackpot control timer (step S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305A in FIG. 17) (step S139).

In step S140, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set. If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S141). When the time reduction flag is set (that is, when it is controlled only in the time reduction state without the probability change state), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is-. 1 (step S142).

Next, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (YES in step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146).

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148).

By transmitting this small hit start designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays on the effect display device 9 that a small hit has occurred.

Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the effect display device 9) is set in the large winning opening control timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening during the big hit or the small hit (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308 in FIG. 17) (step S151).

If the small hit flag is not set (NO in step S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300 in FIG. 17) (step S152). ..

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305A in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. With reference to FIG. 27, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the winning combination operation gate passage waiting flag is set (step S381). The combination operation gate passage waiting flag is a flag indicating that the game ball is waiting to pass through the combination operation gate 33 after the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

When it is determined that the function waiting gate passage waiting flag is not set (NO in step S381), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot display time (in the present embodiment, the time for notifying that the occurrence of the jackpot is allowed) and The large winning opening control timer that measures the time until the invalid period of the continuous operation gate 33 ends is subtracted by 1 (step S382). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the jackpot control timer has timed out, that is, whether or not the jackpot display time has elapsed (step S383). If it is determined that the jackpot display time has not elapsed (NO in step S383), the CPU 56 returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process process of FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot display time has elapsed (YES in step S383), the CPU 56 sets the winning combination operation gate passage waiting flag (step S384). After step S384, and when it is determined that the winning combination operation gate passage waiting flag is set (YES in step S381), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination operating gate 33. (Step S391). If it is determined that the process has not passed (NO in step S391), the CPU 56 returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process process of FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33 (YES in step S391), the CPU 56 resets the combination operation gate passage waiting flag (step S392), and resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag. (Step S393). Then, the CPU 56 sets the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times for a normal big hit or a probable variable big hit, and 2 times for a sudden big hit) in the open number counter (step S394), and issues a command for passing the combined operation gate for effect control. Control for transmission to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S395).

In addition, when the big winning opening control timer for measuring the big hit display time has not timed out, that is, during the invalid period of the winning combination operating gate 33 in which the detection of the passage of the winning combination operating gate 33 has not been started, the CPU 56 A microcomputer for directing control is used to determine whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination operating gate 33, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed, a command for notifying that the combination operation gate 33 is in an invalid period is issued. When the command is received, the effect control microcomputer 100 may display the effect display device 9 indicating that the combination operation gate 33 is in an invalid period.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 21a to open the first large winning opening (first special variable winning ball device 20a) (step S396), and the first large winning opening is in the open state. The first major winning opening opening flag to be shown is set (step S397), and the opening count counter is decremented by 1 (step S398). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S306 in FIG. 17) (step S399), and returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process process in FIG. ..

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening pre-opening process (step S305B) in the special symbol process process. In the pre-opening process of the large winning opening, the CPU 56 sets the value of the large winning opening control timer, which measures the interval period described later, to -1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0, the process ends. The interval period refers to the period between each round after the period between the first round (first round) and the second round.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0, that is, when the interval period has elapsed, the CPU 56 specifies a display state according to the number of rounds while the large winning opening is open (during the round). Control is performed to transmit the designated command (A1XX (H)) during the opening of the winning opening to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S403). The CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the opening number counter for counting the number of rounds during the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 is set with the first large winning opening opening flag indicating that the first large winning opening is in the open state or the second large winning opening opening flag indicating that the second large winning opening is in the open state. Whether or not it is confirmed (step S404), and if none of them is set, the first large winning opening opening flag is set (step S406a). Further, if any of them is set and the first large winning opening opening flag is not set (N in step S405), that is, if the second large winning opening opening flag is set, the second large winning opening is set. The winning opening opening flag is reset, and the first large winning opening opening flag is set (step S408). Then, the solenoid 21a is driven to control the opening of the first large winning opening (first special variable winning ball device 20a) (step S407). On the other hand, if the first big winning opening opening flag is set in step S405 (that is, if the second big winning opening opening flag is not set), the first big winning opening opening flag is reset and the second big winning opening is set. The mouth opening flag is set (step S408). Then, the solenoid 21b is driven to control the opening of the second special winning opening (second special variable winning ball device 20b) (step S409).

In this embodiment, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening are alternately opened, and which of the large winning openings is opened is determined by the first large winning opening opening flag and the second large winning opening opening. It is grasped by the state with the flag. The state in which it is determined in step S405 that the first large winning opening flag is set is the state in which the first large winning opening is opened in the previous round, so that the first large winning opening is set as the next round. The mouth opening flag is reset, the second big winning opening flag is set, and the control to open the second big winning opening is performed. Further, in the state where it is determined in step S404 that neither the first big winning opening opening flag nor the second big winning opening opening flag is set, the big hit game in which none of the big winning opening has been opened yet. Since it is in the started state, as the first round, the first big winning opening opening flag is set and the control to open the first big winning opening is performed.

After that, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the open count counter by -1 (step S410). In addition, a value corresponding to the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened is set in the large winning opening control timer in each round (step S411). For example, in the case of a 15-round jackpot, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of a sudden probability variation jackpot or small hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening processing (step S306) (step S412).

29 and 30 are flowcharts showing the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S306) in the special symbol process process. In the process of opening the large winning opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the large winning opening control timer by -1 (step S420).

Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S421). When the value of the winning opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b are turned on (step S432), and the first count switch 23a and the second count switch are checked. If 23b is not turned on, the process ends. When the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b are turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the winning number of the game ball to the large winning opening is incremented by +1 (step S433). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S434). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number, the process ends. The determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first large winning opening opening flag is set. (Step S435a), if it is set, the solenoid 21a is driven to close the first winning opening (step S435b), and if it is not set, that is, the second winning opening is opened. When the flag is set, the solenoid 21b is driven to control the closing of the second winning opening (step S435c). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S436).

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the open count counter (step S438). When the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (NO in step S438), the CPU 56 specifies the display state according to the number of rounds after opening the large winning opening (after the end of the round). Control is performed to transmit the post-designated command (A2XX (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of one round to the start of the next round is set in the large winning opening control timer (step S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the large winning opening. The value is updated according to the pre-opening process (step S305B) (step S441). The interval period set in step S440 is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of a sudden change big hit or small hit, the period may be shorter than the 15R big hit. Further, in step S440, for example, the interval period is set to an extremely short period (for example, 1 second) in the case of a 15R big hit, and set to a longer period in the case of a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit. May be good. By doing so, in the case of a 15R jackpot, the period from when the first big winning opening is controlled to the closed state to when the second big winning opening is controlled to the open state can be shortened. It is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has reached the first major winning opening at the timing when the first major winning opening is controlled to be closed will win the second major winning opening without being taken into the out opening 26. In addition, the interval period when switching the target to be controlled to the open state from the 2nd big winning opening to the 1st big winning opening should be shorter than the interval period when switching from the 1st big winning opening to the 2nd big winning opening. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence rate of a situation in which the game ball does not win any of the major winning openings.

When the value of the opening count counter is 0 (YES in step S438), the CPU 56 resets the set one of the first large winning opening opening flag and the second large winning opening opening flag (when the value is YES). Step S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S307 of FIG. 17) (step S443).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control is performed to transmit the jackpot end designation command (step S162). Here, if it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 1 designation command is sent, if it is a probability change big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent, and if it is a sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / suddenly Probability change jackpot end specification command is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S163), and the process is terminated.

Similar to the case of the small hit shown in FIGS. 63 (B) and 63 (C) described later, in the case of the sudden big hit, the big hit end display time is set to 12.3 seconds in the case of the low base, and the high base. If so, it is set to 1.1 seconds. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the small hit / sudden big hit end designation command, it executes an effect that can be executed within 12.3 seconds if it is a low base, and 1.1 seconds if it is a high base. Perform a production that can be performed within.

In step S164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 confirms whether the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S166). Whether or not the probability change jackpot or the sudden probability variation jackpot is specifically determined by whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" to "03". It can be judged by checking. If it is neither a probabilistic jackpot nor a sudden probabilistic jackpot (that is, if it is a normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts the gaming state to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter for counting the time reduction number (step S168). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S169). Then, the process proceeds to step S173.

If it is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag (step S171). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S172). Then, the process proceeds to step S173.

In this embodiment, the time saving flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened or the number of times of opening is increased. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process processing (see step S27), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag is set when the variation display result of the normal symbol is hit, and sets it. If so, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened by lengthening the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. Further, the time saving flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300 in FIG. 17) (step S173).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening pre-processing (step S308 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process processing. With reference to FIG. 32, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the large winning opening control timer that measures the small hit display time (first round) or the interval period (second and subsequent rounds) (step S2461), and controls the large winning opening. It is determined whether or not the timer has timed out (step S2462).

When it is determined that the big winning opening control timer has not timed out, that is, the small hit display time or the interval period has not elapsed (NO in step S2462), the CPU 56 executes the process to be executed by the special symbol process process of FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big winning opening control timer has timed out, that is, the small hit display time or the interval period has elapsed (YES in step S2462), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first big winning opening opening flag is set. Is determined (step S2463).

When it is determined that the first big winning opening opening flag is not set, that is, the first round of the small hit or the next round in which the second big winning opening is opened (NO in step S2463), the CPU 56 Determines whether or not the second large winning opening opening flag is set (step S2464). If it is determined that the setting is set (YES in step S2464), the CPU 56 resets the second large winning opening opening flag (step S2465).

When it is determined that the second winning opening opening flag is not set (NO in step S2464), and after step S2465, the CPU 56 sets the first winning opening opening flag (step S2466), and the solenoid 21a Is driven to open the first large winning opening (first special variable winning ball device 20a) (step S2467).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first large winning opening opening flag is set, that is, it is the next round in which the first large winning opening is opened (YES in step SS2463), the CPU 56 determines that the first large winning opening is open. Control to reset the open flag (step S2468), set the second special winning opening opening flag (step S2469), and drive the solenoid 21a to open the second major winning opening (second special variable winning ball device 20b). (Step S2470).

After step S2467 and step S2470, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter (step S2471). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0. Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the small hit opening time (for example, 0.1 second) in the large winning opening control timer (step S2472), and subtracts 1 from the opening number counter (step S2473). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step S309 in FIG. 17) (step S2474).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (step S309 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. With reference to FIG. 33, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the large winning opening control timer that measures the small hit opening time (step S2481), and determines whether or not the large winning opening control timer has timed out (step S2482). ..

When it is determined that the large winning opening control timer has not timed out, that is, the small hit opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S2482), the CPU 56 has the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b turned on. If it is determined whether or not the result is (step S2483) and it is determined that the state is turned on (YES in step S2483), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2484).

After step S2484, and when it is determined that the first count switch 23a and the second count switch 23b are not in the ON state (NO in step S2483), the CPU 56 has reached the value of the winning number counter. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening has reached 10 (step S2485).

The value of the winning number counter has not reached 10, that is, the small hit opening time has not passed, and the winning numbers of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening have not reached 10 (step S2485). If it is determined as NO), the CPU 56 returns the process to be executed to the special symbol process process of FIG.

On the other hand, the large winning opening control timer has timed out, or the value of the winning number counter has reached 10, that is, the small hit opening time has elapsed, or the winning numbers of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening. When it is determined that the number reaches 10 (YES in step S2482 or step S2485), the CPU 56 stops driving the solenoids 21a and 21b and either the first large winning opening (first special variable winning ball device 20a) or the second. Control is performed to close the open side of the large winning opening (second special variable winning ball device 20b) (step S2486).

If it is determined that the number of winnings in the first and second major winning openings has reached 10 (YES in step S2485) at the first opening, the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process. The value corresponding to (step S310 in FIG. 17) may be updated so that the process proceeds to the small hit end process.

Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter has become 0 (step S2489). If it is determined that there is no small hit round remaining (NO in step S2489), a value corresponding to the interval period is set in the large winning opening control timer (step S2490), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S308 in FIG. 17) (step S2491), and the processing to be executed is returned to the special symbol process processing in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the opening count counter becomes 0, that is, there are no small hit rounds remaining (YES in step S2489), the first large winning opening opening flag and the second large winning opening opening flag are displayed. The set one is reset (step S2492), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit end process (step S310 in FIG. 17) (step S2493), and the process to be executed is shown in the figure. Return to the special symbol process processing of 17.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S310 in FIG. 17) in the special symbol process process. With reference to FIG. 34, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S2160).

When it is determined that the small hit end display timer is not set (NO in step S2160), the CPU 56 resets the small hit flag (step S2161) and controls to send the small hit / sudden big hit end designation command (step S2161). Step S2162), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed on the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step S2163) and executed. The processing to be performed is returned to the special symbol process processing of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (B) and 63 (C) described later, the small hit end display time is set to 12.3 seconds for the low base and 1.1 seconds for the high base. To. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the small hit / sudden big hit end designation command, it executes an effect that can be executed within 12.3 seconds if it is a low base, and 1.1 seconds if it is a high base. Perform a production that can be performed within.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit end display timer is set (YES in step S2160), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the small hit end display timer value (step S2164), and the small hit end display timer value is set. It is determined whether or not the value has become 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2165). If it is determined that the process has not elapsed (NO in step S2165), the process to be executed is returned to the special symbol process process of FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step S2165), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300 in FIG. 17). Step S2166), the process to be executed is returned to the special symbol process process of FIG.

FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing various signals output to the terminal board 160. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 gives a start port signal, a symbol confirmation number 1 signal, and a symbol confirmation number 2 signals to the terminal board 160. , 1 jackpot signal, 2 jackpot signals, 3 jackpot signals, a time saving signal, a security signal, and a high-accuracy middle signal are output by information output processing (see step S29 in FIG. 9) on the game control microcomputer 560 side. Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball signal 1 and the game machine error status signal are transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 to the terminal board 160 via the main board 31. Is output by the information output process on the payout control microcomputer 370 side.

In this embodiment, the prize ball signal 1 and the game machine error status signal input from the payout control microcomputer 370 are branched on the main board 31 without being input to the game control microcomputer 560. Although the case where the input is directly input to the terminal board 160 is shown, the input to the terminal board 160 may be configured via the game control microcomputer 560.

The start port signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. The symbol fixed number 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of fluctuations of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The symbol fixed number 2 signal is a signal for notifying only the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol. The jackpot 1 signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot game is in progress. In this embodiment, the big hit 1 signal is output only when the big hit game is in progress, and is not output when the small hit game is in progress. The big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are signals for notifying that the big hit game is in progress or the small hit game is in progress. The time saving signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot state is in effect and that the variable time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (during the time saving state).

The security signal is a signal indicating the security status of the game machine. Specifically, when it is determined that an abnormal winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 14 based on the detection result of the second starting opening switch 14a and the detection result of the winning confirmation switch 14b, a security signal is output. It is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 4 minutes). Further, even when the power is turned on to the game machine and the initialization process is executed, the security signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The signal output externally as a security signal is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, not only the abnormal winning of the second starting winning opening 14 but also the abnormal winning of the large winning opening and the first starting winning opening 13 may be detected and externally output as a security signal. Further, for example, when abnormal magnetism is detected by a magnet sensor provided in the game machine or when an abnormal radio wave is detected by a radio wave sensor provided in the game machine, it is configured to be externally output as a security signal. May be good. In addition, for example, when an abnormality of various switches provided in the game machine is detected (for example, when the occurrence of a short circuit or the like is detected by determining that the input value exceeds the threshold value), it can be output externally as a security signal. It may be configured as follows. In this way, even one signal line can be connected if it is configured so that an abnormal prize, an abnormal magnetic error, or an abnormal radio wave error can be output externally as a security signal from the common connector CN7 of the terminal board 160. By doing so, it is possible to enable error detection with an external device such as a hall computer, and it is possible to reduce the work load related to error detection.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of detections by the second start opening switch 14a and the number of detections by the winning confirmation switch 14b are equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 10), and the second start winning opening 14 is subjected to. The case where it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred and a security signal is output to the outside is shown. For example, the value of the normal symbol process flag used in the normal symbol process processing is that the variable winning ball device 15 is being opened. When the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 14a when the value is not the indicated value, it is determined that an abnormal winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and a security signal is output externally. May be good.

The high-probability medium signal is a signal indicating that the gaming state is controlled to a high-probability state (probability variation state). In this embodiment, the high-accuracy middle signal is output to the outside via the terminal board 160 from the recovery from the power failure until the predetermined condition is satisfied (specifically, until the first big hit occurs).

Further, the prize ball signal 1 is a signal output every time one prize ball payout is detected. Further, the game machine error state signal is a signal indicating that the game machine is in an error state (in this example, a ball out error state or a full tank error state). In addition, instead of outputting the prize ball signal 1 externally every time one prize ball payout is detected, some prize ball signal is output every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) prize ball payouts are detected. May be good.

36 to 39 are flowcharts showing the information output process of step S29. Of the processes shown in FIGS. 36 to 39, steps S1002 to S1030 are processes for outputting a start port signal, and steps S1031 to S1036 are processes for outputting a symbol confirmation number 1 signal. S1037 to S1042 are processes for outputting 2 signals of the number of symbol determinations, and steps S1050 to S1064 are processes for outputting 1 big hit signal, 2 big hit signals, 3 big hit signals, and a time saving signal. Further, steps S1069 to S1074 are processes for outputting a security signal, and steps S1075 to S1077 are processes for outputting a high-accuracy medium signal.

In the information output process, the CPU 56 sets the initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1001). Then, the address of the start port information setting table is set in the pointer (step S1002), and the number of processes pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S1003). In the start port information setting table, the number of processes (= 2), two start port switch input bits (first start port switch input bit determination value (01 (H))), and a second start port switch input bit determination value (02) (H))) is set. The first start port switch input bit determination value is a determination value for determining whether or not there is a start prize in the first start winning opening 13, and the second start port switch input bit determination value is a second. This is a determination value for determining whether or not there is a start winning prize in the starting winning opening 14. In step S1003, since the pointer points to the address of the number of processes in the start port information setting table, the data of the number of processes (= 2) in the start port information setting table is loaded.

Next, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1004) and sets the switch-on buffer in the switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is added by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer is loaded into the register (step S1007), and the logical product of the start port switch input bit and the switch input data is obtained (step S1008). In this case, when the number of processes is 1, the first start port switch input bit is loaded and the logical product of the switch input data is obtained. When the number of processes is 2, the second start port switch input The bits are loaded and the switch input data is ANDed. When the number of processes is 1 and the first start port switch 13a is on, the operation result of the logical product is 01 (H). Further, when the number of processes is 2 and the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the calculation result of the logical product is 02 (H). When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are not turned on, the calculation result of the logical product is 00 (H).

If the operation result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1015. If the operation result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S1009), it is determined that the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 has been won, and the starting opening information storage counter is loaded into the register. (Step S1010). The start port information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the start port signal (that is, the number of remaining wins of the start prizes that have not been output of the start port signal). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the start port information storage counter (step S1011). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the calculation result (addition result) is not 0 (step S1012). When the calculation result is 0 (N in step S1012), the calculation result is subtracted by 1 (step S1013). Then, the calculation result is stored in the start port information storage counter (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1015) and determines whether or not the number of processes is not 0 (step S1016). When the number of processes is not 0 (Y in step S1016), the process proceeds to step S1004. In this embodiment, since the gaming machine includes the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, 2 is set as the initial value of the number of processes, and the processes of steps S1004 to S1016 are 2. It will be executed once.

When it is determined in step S1016 that the number of processes is 0 (N in step S1016), the CPU 56 loads the start port information storage timer (step S1017) and reflects the state of the start port information storage timer in the flag register. (Step S1018), it is determined whether or not the start port signal is being output (step S1019). The start port information storage timer is a timer for measuring the on time and the off time (for example, on time 200 ms and off time 200 ms) of the start port signal. If the value of the start port information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the start port signal is being output, and if the value of the start port information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the start port signal is not being output.

If the start port signal is being output (Y in step S1019), the process proceeds to step S1026. If the start port signal is not being output (N in step S1019), the CPU 56 loads the start port information storage counter (step S1020) and reflects the state of the start port information storage counter in the flag register (step S1021). , It is determined whether or not there is a remaining number of output times of the start port signal (step S1022). When the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a are turned on (N in step S1009), the start port information storage counter is added (the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a). If either one of them is on, 1 is added, and if both are on, 2 is added), so it is determined that there is a remaining number of output times of the start port signal.

If there is no remaining number of output times of the start port signal (Y in step S1022), the process proceeds to step S1031. If there is a remaining number of output times of the start port signal (N in step S1023), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the start port information storage counter (step S1023), and calculates the calculation result (result of 1 subtraction) from the start port information storage counter. Store in (step S1024). Then, the winning information operation time (100) is set in the register (step S1025). The winning information operation time (100) is a time during which a 4 ms timer interrupt is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.400 seconds (400 ms).

Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the start port information storage timer if the winning information operating time is not set in step S1025, and subtracts 1 from the winning information operating time if the winning information operating time is set in step S1025. (Step S1026). Then, the calculation result (result of subtracting 1) is stored in the start port information storage timer (step S1027).

The CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the winning information on time (50) (step S1029), and determines whether or not the calculation result is shorter than the winning information on time (step S1030). The winning information on time (50) is a time during which a 4 ms timer interrupt is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

When the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, when the calculation result (remaining time of the start port 1 information storage timer) is longer than the winning information on time (200 ms) (N in step S1029). ), The CPU 56 sets the start port output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) (step S1030). When the start port output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103, whereby the start port signal is output to the output port 1. Will be output from.

By the processing of steps S1001 to S1030 shown above, the first start winning opening 13 is won (the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on), and the second starting winning opening 14 is won (the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on). ) Occurs, a start port signal is output. That is, after the start port signal is turned on for 200 ms, it is turned off for 200 ms. By inputting this starting port signal to the hall computer, it is possible to recognize the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14.

Since the start port signal is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms, the next start port is turned off for 200 ms even if a start winning prize is continuously generated for a short time. A signal is output. That is, the start port signal is output at intervals of at least 200 ms.

In this way, since the start port signal is output at intervals of at least 200 ms, the hall computer can surely grasp the total number of start prizes.

Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol confirmation number 1 information timer into the register (step S1031), reflects the state of the symbol confirmation number 1 information timer in the flag register (step S1032), and the symbol confirmation number 1 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not this is done (step S1033). In this embodiment, when the fluctuation time times out in the special symbol changing process (see step S303), the symbol confirmation number output time (in this example, the symbol confirmation number output time) is set to the symbol confirmation number 1 information timer when the special symbol variation is stopped. When 0.500 seconds) is set and the symbol confirmation count output time has not elapsed, it is determined that the symbol confirmation count 1 information timer has not timed out, and when the symbol confirmation count output time has elapsed (symbol confirmation). (When the value of the number 1 information timer is 0), it is determined that the symbol confirmation number 1 information timer has timed out.

If the symbol confirmation count 1 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1033), the symbol confirmation count 1 information timer is subtracted by 1 (step S1034), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol confirmation count 1 information timer (step S1035). .. Then, the symbol determination count 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) is set (step S1036). When the symbol confirmation count 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. Is output from output port 1 (turns on). If the symbol confirmation count 1 information timer times out (Y in step S1033), the process of step S1036 is not executed, and as a result, the symbol confirmation count 1 signal is turned off.

By the processing of steps S1031 to S1036 shown above, each time the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped (the stopped symbol is confirmed), the symbol confirmation number 1 signal is the symbol confirmation number output time (for example, 500 ms). Turns on.

Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol confirmation number 2 information timer into the register (step S1037), reflects the state of the symbol confirmation number 2 information timer in the flag register (step S1038), and the symbol confirmation number 2 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not (step S1039). In this embodiment, if the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer in the special symbol changing process (see step S303) (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). B) When the fluctuation time times out, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the symbol confirmation count output time (0.500 seconds in this example) is set in the symbol confirmation count 2 information timer, and the symbol confirmation count output time is set. When is not elapsed, it is determined that the symbol confirmation count 2 information timer has not timed out, and when the symbol confirmation count output time has elapsed (when the value of the symbol confirmation count 2 information timer is 0), the symbol is confirmed. Number of times 2 It is determined that the information timer has timed out.

If the symbol confirmation count 2 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1039), the symbol confirmation count 2 information timer is subtracted by 1 (step S1040), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol confirmation count 2 information timer (step S1041). .. Then, the symbol determination count 2 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 2 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) is set (step S1042). Information buffer symbol confirmation count 2 When the output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. Is output from output port 1 (turns on). If the symbol confirmation number 2 information timer times out (Y in step S1039), the process of step S1042 is not executed, and as a result, the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is turned off.

By the processing of steps S1037 to S1042 shown above, every time the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (stopped symbol is confirmed), the symbol confirmation number 2 signal is turned on for the symbol confirmation number output time (for example, 500 ms).

Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1050), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the designated value for pre-processing for opening the first large winning opening (“5”) (step S1051), and performs the special symbol process. It is determined whether the value of the flag is less than 5 (step S1052). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1052), the process proceeds to step S1057. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1052), the value of the special symbol process flag is further compared with the specified value for small hit release preprocessing (“9”) (step S1053), and the special symbol is used. It is determined whether the value of the process flag is 9 or more (step S1054). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 9 or more (Y in step S1054), the process proceeds to step S1057. When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 9 (N in step S1054), the jackpot 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1055). When the jackpot 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the jackpot 1 signal is output to the output port 1 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 1 in step S1103. Is output from (turns on).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a time saving check process for confirming whether or not the time saving state is present (step S1057), and determines whether or not the time saving state is present (step S1058). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the time saving state is achieved by confirming whether or not the time saving flag that is set when shifting to the time saving state is set. In the time saving state (Y in step S1058), the time saving output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1059). When the time saving output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103, whereby the time saving signal is output from the output port 1. (Turns on).

Further, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1060), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the specified value (“5”) for the first large winning opening pre-processing (step S1061), and compares the value with the special symbol process flag. It is determined whether or not the value of is less than 5 (step S1062). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1062), the process proceeds to step S1069. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1062), the jackpot 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1063), and the jackpot 3 output bit position is set (step S1064). When the jackpot 2 output bit position and the jackpot 3 output bit position are set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 1 in step S1103. Three jackpot signals are output from output port 1 (turned on).

By the processing of steps S1050 to S1064 shown above, one big hit signal, two big hit signals, three big hit signals, and a time saving signal are output (turned on) according to the type of big hit and the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 loads the security signal information timer (step S1069), reflects the state of the security signal information timer in the flag register (step S1070), and determines whether or not the security signal information timer has timed out (step S1070). S1071). In this embodiment, it is determined that the detection difference between the second start opening switch 14a and the winning confirmation switch 14b has reached a predetermined value (10 in this example) or more, and it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred in the starting winning opening. If this is the case, a predetermined time (4 minutes in this example) is set in the security signal information timer (switch normal / abnormal check processing executed by the switch processing in FIG. 9), and the predetermined time has not elapsed. Is determined that the security signal information timer has not timed out, and when the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), it is determined that the security signal information timer has timed out.

Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) is set in the security signal information timer even when the power supply to the game machine is started and the initialization process is executed, and the predetermined time is set. When is not elapsed, it is determined that the security signal information timer has not timed out, and when the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the security signal information timer is 0), the security signal information timer has timed out. It is judged.

If the security signal information timer has not timed out (N in step S1071), the security signal information timer is subtracted by 1 (step S1072), and the calculation result is stored in the security signal information timer (step S1073). Then, the security signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 7 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 5) is set (step S1074). When the security signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the security signal is output from the output port 1 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 1 in the step S1103. Output (turns on). If the security signal information timer times out (Y in step S1071), the processing in step S1074 is not executed, and as a result, the security signal is turned off.

By the processing of steps S1069 to S1074 shown above, the initialization processing is executed until 4 minutes have passed from the detection of the abnormal winning of the second starting winning opening 14 or when the power supply to the game machine is started. A security signal is output using the common connector CN8 of the terminal board 160 until 30 seconds have elapsed. If a new abnormal prize is detected during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is continued until 4 minutes have passed since the last detection of the abnormal prize.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high accuracy medium output permission flag is set (step S1075). The high-accuracy medium output permission flag is set when the power failure recovery process is executed at the start of power supply to the game machine. If the high accuracy medium output permission flag is set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S1076). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability middle signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 7 of output port 0 in the example shown in FIG. 5) (step S1077). When the high-accuracy medium signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1102, and the output value is output to the output port 0 in step S1103. Output from output port 0 (turns on). In this embodiment, if the first big hit occurs after the power failure is restored, the high accuracy middle output permission flag is reset (see step S393 in FIG. 29), and as a result, the high accuracy middle signal is turned off. Become.

In this embodiment, the case where the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is reset when the first big hit occurs is shown, but the timing at which the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is reset is in this embodiment. Not limited to what is shown. For example, it may be configured to reset the high-accuracy medium output permission flag even when a small hit occurs. Further, for example, when the probability change state is configured to end based on the execution of the variation display a predetermined number of times after being controlled to the probability change state, the probability change state is terminated by ending the predetermined number of fluctuation displays. It may be configured to reset the high accuracy medium output permission flag at the end.

After the power failure is restored by the processing of steps S107 to S1077 shown above, if the probability change flag is set, the high probability middle signal is obtained until the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, until the first big hit occurs). Is output (turns on). That is, in this embodiment, as described above, the probability change flag is held in the backup RAM for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped. Therefore, if the probability change state is controlled before the power failure occurs, the probability change flag should be held in the backup RAM, so the output of the high probability middle signal is started when the power failure is restored, and the first big hit occurs. The output of the high-accuracy middle signal is continued until

In this embodiment, when the first big hit occurs, the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is reset (see step S393 in FIG. 29), so that the high-accuracy medium output signal is subsequently output. It disappears. Therefore, in this embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, if the first big hit occurs), the output of the high-accuracy middle signal is prohibited.

In this embodiment, only the process of setting the high-accuracy medium output permission flag is performed when the power failure recovery process of the main process is executed, and it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag is set in the information output process of step S29. Although the case where the processing is performed so as to output the high-accuracy medium signal is shown, the processing method for the high-accuracy medium signal output is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. For example, it is confirmed whether or not the probability change flag is set in the power failure recovery process of the main process, and if it is set, the high accuracy middle signal output bit position of the information buffer can be set, or the high accuracy middle signal output can be set. A high-accuracy medium signal may be output by performing processing such as setting a timer. Then, even when the probability change flag is confirmed in the power failure recovery process and the output of the high accuracy medium signal is started in this way, it is high when a predetermined condition is satisfied such as when the first big hit occurs. It may be configured to control to stop the output of the accuracy signal and then to control not to output the accuracy signal thereafter.

In this embodiment, the output bit positions of the corresponding signals in the information output processing shown in FIGS. 36 to 39 are set for each timer interrupt (steps S1030, S1036, S1042, S1055, S1059, S1063, S1064). , S1074, S1077), steps S1102 and S1103 are executed to output externally from output ports 0 and 1, but the value of the corresponding output bit is the previous setting for the output state of each signal. It does not change unless it changes. For example, if the value of the corresponding output bit is set to "1", the signal will continue to be output while it is set.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). .. After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) from each process according to the control state.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S706). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 14 and 15) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

42 to 43 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S622). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S623).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 stores the second byte data (EXT data) of the first hold storage number designation command in the first hold storage. It is stored as a number in the first reserved storage number storage area (step S652).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 stores the second byte data (EXT data) of the second hold storage number designation command in the second hold storage. It is stored as a number in the second reserved storage number storage area (step S655).

Next, if the received effect control command is any of the winning determination result specification commands (step S664), the effect control CPU 101 determines the winning determination result according to the received winning determination result specification command. The result storage buffer is stored in the area associated with the total number of pending storages (step S665), and the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S671). If it is configured to determine the presence or absence of a big hit and the fluctuation pattern at the time of starting prize and transmit the determination result by different commands, it is transmitted based on the determination process at the time of starting winning in step S664. By confirming whether or not all the commands are received, it is possible to determine whether or not the command transmission / reception processing is normally performed.

In this embodiment, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the total reserved storage number is stored in the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area and the second reserved storage number storage area. It is obtained by adding up the number of second reserved storages. The first hold storage number is updated in step S652 after receiving the first hold storage number designation command, and the second hold storage number is updated in step S655 after receiving the second hold storage number designation command. Therefore, the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. Further, the winning determination result designation command is transmitted after the first hold storage number designation command is transmitted in step S1218 of the start port switch passing process, and the second hold storage number designation command is transmitted in step S1228. Will be sent later. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the winning determination result designation command after updating the total pending storage number. In the process of step S665, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, the data of the second byte of the winning determination result specification command in the storage area associated with the total reserved storage number in the winning determination result buffer. This is because the winning determination result is specified by the second byte data (EXT data) of the winning determination result designation command (see FIG. 16). Further, the data set in the winning determination result storage buffer is deleted in order from the previously set data in the effect symbol variation start process (timing at which the process of step S1800 is executed, etc.) described later. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 manages the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 100 manages the game control microcomputer 560. Based on the command to specify the transmitted 1st hold storage number or 2nd hold storage number, the 1st hold storage number, the 2nd hold storage number, and the total hold storage number are recognized, and the recognized hold storage number. The value of is used in the process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100. That is, the total number of reserved storages used in the effect control microcomputer 100 has the same name as the total number of reserved storages managed by the game control microcomputer 560, but is managed by the game control microcomputer 560. The total number of pending storages is not used as it is, but is recognized based on the command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (a winning determination result storage buffer) for storing a winning determination result. As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, eight storage areas associated with the total number of reserved storages are secured in the winning determination result storage buffer. Further, in this embodiment, a hold display corresponding to the specified variation display is usually used to indicate that the variation display specified by the winning determination result may be a big hit based on the winning determination result. The pre-reading effect foretelling is executed by changing to a display mode other than the above. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 44, as data related to the look-ahead effect that can be associated with the winning determination result (that is, the variation display specified by the winning determination result and the hold display corresponding to the specified variation display). , A hold display mode showing the display mode of the current hold display, a final display mode showing which display mode is finally changed and displayed by the look-ahead effect, and a look-ahead effect pattern showing the pattern of the look-ahead effect to be executed. And the shift count counter that indicates the timing at which the hold display changes when the look-ahead effect is executed (in this example, how many times the hold display changes), and the display mode of the hold display may change. The suggestion effect mode (in the example of FIG. 44, the suggestion effect mode executed at the timing when the hold display changes) is shown.

The data set in the winning determination result storage buffer is deleted in order from the previously set data in the effect symbol variation start processing (timing when the processing of step S1800 is executed, etc.) described later, and the corresponding hold display is also displayed. It is displayed shifted at the same time. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the effect symbol variation start process (timing at which the process of step S1800 is executed) described later is performed once, the data set in the winning determination result storage buffer is stored. , The state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 44 (B). Further, when the effect symbol variation start process (timing at which the process of step S1800 is executed, etc.) is performed twice, the data set in the winning determination result storage buffer shifts to the state shown in FIG. 44 (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 44, it is specified whether the winning determination result is based on either the first starting winning prize or the second starting winning prize. Therefore, in the process of step S67111 described later, the first starting start is performed. The hold display based on the prize and the hold display based on the second start prize are displayed in different display modes (for example, the hold display based on the first start prize is displayed in red, and the hold display based on the second start prize is displayed in blue. It may be displayed).

In addition, when it is configured to preferentially execute the variable display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in order to distinguish which winning judgment result is. The first winning judgment result storage buffer for storing the winning judgment result at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second winning judgment result at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 are saved. A buffer for storing the judgment result at the time of winning may be prepared. In this case, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first winning determination result storage buffer. Further, in the second winning determination result storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. Further, in this case, the EXT data of the received winning determination result designation command is stored in the first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer. The winning determination result storage buffer (the first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer) is formed in the RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100.

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S683). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

Next, the look-ahead effect will be described. The look-ahead effect is executed before the variable display that is the target of the effect is started, and the variable display that is the target of the effect becomes a big hit or a specific variation (for example, including a reach effect). It is a notice production that announces that. In this embodiment, as a look-ahead effect, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) to be notified is a display mode different from the normal display mode (hereinafter, normal mode). An effect is performed in which the display is changed to (a special mode described later, a first special mode, or a second special mode).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect determination process. In the look-ahead effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is greater than 1 (step S67101). In this embodiment, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the total reserved storage number is stored in the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area and the second reserved storage number storage area. It is obtained by adding up the number of second reserved storages. If the total number of hold storages is not larger than 1, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the total hold storage display unit 18c in the normal mode (step S67111). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode. .. In this embodiment, the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display as the look-ahead effect is limited to the timing for shifting the hold display. Therefore, when the total number of hold storages that do not have a chance to shift is 1, the look-ahead display is performed. Although the effect is not executed, if it is allowed to change the display mode (or display in a display mode other than the normal mode from the beginning) as a look-ahead effect even at the time of starting prize, even when the total number of reserved memories is 1. Since the look-ahead effect can be executed, the process of step S67101 is omitted. Further, even when the execution of the look-ahead effect is permitted even when the total number of hold storages is 1, for example, the look-ahead is based on the second look-ahead effect pattern (the display mode of the hold display changes twice) described later. The execution of the effect may be restricted.

If the total number of pending storages is larger than 1, the effect control CPU 101 stores the latest winning judgment result (the winning judgment result indicated by the winning judgment result specification command received this time) stored in the winning judgment result storage buffer. Extract (step S67102).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the extracted winning determination result (step S67104).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is changing the hold display to a display mode other than the normal mode (that is, the hold display is displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode on the total hold storage display unit 18c). It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect by using the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 46 according to the state of the pending display changing flag indicating (that).

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a look-ahead effect execution determination table. The look-ahead effect execution decision table is assigned a judgment value corresponding to a decision item (“execute the look-ahead effect” or “do not execute the look-ahead effect”) for each winning judgment result. An example shown in FIG. In, for the sake of brevity, the percentage of the assigned determination values is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and a determination item (“executes the look-ahead effect” or “executes the look-ahead effect”) to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned. "Do not execute look-ahead effect") is decided. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 46, the numerical values corresponding to "execute the look-ahead effect" and "do not execute the look-ahead effect" in each winning determination result are determined as "execute the look-ahead effect" or "look-ahead effect". The percentage (%) in which "do not execute the effect" is selected is shown.

In this embodiment, in addition to the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 46, the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A) and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and 47 (C). , The pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 and the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 52 are also actually assigned judgment values, but the determinations are assigned to simplify the explanation. The percentage of values is shown. Further, in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, and S67110 in which these tables are used, the effect control CPU 101 also uses, for example, the final display mode, the look-ahead effect pattern, the change timing (number of shifts), or the same as in step S67104. A random number for determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect is extracted, and a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned to the item.

In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect execution determination table (when the hold display changing flag is not set) or FIG. 46 (B) shown in FIG. 46 (A) according to the state of the hold display changing flag. Select the pre-reading effect execution decision table (when the flag is set while the hold display is changing). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect at a ratio determined for each winning effect determination result in the selected look-ahead effect execution determination table based on the extracted latest winning effect determination result. To do. For example, when the winning determination result indicates that "shortened non-reach is out", the effect control CPU 101 does not execute the look-ahead effect at a rate of 100% regardless of the state of the pending display changing flag. To decide. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 is shown to be "pseudo-ream 3 super hit" in the winning determination result, and when the hold display changing flag is not set, the look-ahead effect is produced at a rate of 99%. Is determined to be executed, and when the hold display changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the look-ahead effect at a rate of 50%.

What is characteristic of the look-ahead effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 46 is that the display result is "out of place" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 (21) designation to the winning judgment result 7 (27) designation). When the display result is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 8 (28) designation to the winning judgment result 12 (32) designation), the look-ahead effect is executed. The judgment value is set so that the ratio becomes high. Further, what is characteristic of the look-ahead effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 46 is that even if the display results are the same, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed (for example, the super reach is performed rather than the normal reach). , The determination value is set so that the rate at which the look-ahead effect is executed is high. By having such a feature, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice is higher than when the look-ahead effect is not executed, and it is expected to be a big hit. It is possible to increase the proportion of reach production with a high degree. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the look-ahead effect is executed.

Further, what is characteristic of the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that when the hold display changing flag is set (that is, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, any hold display is other than the normal mode. When the hold display changing flag is not set (that is, in the total hold storage display unit 18c), none of the hold displays is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode when the hold display is displayed in the display mode. The determination value is set so that the rate at which the look-ahead effect is executed is lower than that of (when). By having such a feature, when any of the hold displays is already displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit 18c, it is unlikely that a new look-ahead effect is executed. Therefore, for example, when a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change is executed, the hold displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode is displayed more than the hold display displayed in the normal mode. The rate at which the display mode of the display changes can be further increased (that is, the display is changed from the special mode to the special mode by the pre-reading effect (details will be described later) based on the second pre-reading effect pattern started earlier). Can be increased). Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, in addition to the normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided as display modes of the hold display, and the degree of expectation of a big hit is different for each. (Strictly speaking, in this embodiment, if the final display mode is a special mode, the expectation of a big hit is 0, but the hold display of the special mode is the first special mode or the second mode. Since it may change to a special mode, it can be said that there is a high expectation that the hold display will be displayed in a special mode as a big hit). Therefore, it is desirable for the player to change to a display mode with a high expectation of becoming a big hit. Therefore, when any of the hold displays is already displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the hold display is likely to change to a display mode with a high expectation of becoming a big hit. It is possible to make people interested in the display mode of the hold display when the look-ahead effect (suggestion effect) is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the look-ahead effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 46, it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at a rate of 1% even when the judgment result at the time of winning is "non-reach out", but "non-reach" ("shortened non-reach out"". Or, in the case of "non-reach off"), it may not be decided to execute the look-ahead effect. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 46, a determination value (ratio) for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is set for each variation pattern shown in the winning determination result. (For example, "missing", "normal big hit" or "probability big hit" or "suddenly probable big hit" or "small hit") is set as a judgment value (ratio) for determining whether to execute the look-ahead effect. You may be.

Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the look-ahead effect (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67106. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the look-ahead effect (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the total hold storage display unit 18c in the normal mode. (Step S67111).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is finally displayed in the look-ahead effect (step S67106). In this embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the normal mode (displayed with "○" in this example (see FIG. 62)), a special mode (in this example, "x" in "○") (Including), the first special aspect (in this example, "△" is included in “○”) and the second special aspect (in this example, “○” is included in “○”) are provided. There is. However, as will be described later, the hold display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode by the time the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the hold display is started. May be displayed.

FIG. 47 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table. In step S67106, the effect control CPU 101 finally determines which display mode to display (hereinafter, also referred to as the final display mode) using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A). Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each winning judgment result (display result of variable display) in the final display mode determination table based on the extracted latest winning determination result. For example, when the winning judgment result indicates that the display result of the variable display is "missing" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 (21) designation to the winning judgment result 7 (27) designation). The effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as a special mode at a rate of 60%, a first special mode at a rate of 30%, and a second special mode at a rate of 10%. Further, for example, when the winning judgment result indicates that the display result of the variable display is "normal big hit" or "probability variable big hit" (winning judgment result 8 (28) designation to winning judgment result 12 ( 32) Corresponding to the designation), the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 20% and the second special mode at a rate of 80%.

What is characteristic of the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 47 (A) is that when the display result is "missing" (corresponding to the designation of the winning judgment result 1 (21) to the designation of the winning judgment result 7 (27)). ), The case where the display result is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 8 (28) designation to the winning judgment result 12 (32) designation) is the second special. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined by the aspect is high. By having such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display to be notified is higher than when the hold display is displayed in the first special mode. can do. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation that the display in the second special mode will be a big hit than in the first special mode, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed when the look-ahead effect is executed. Can be focused on. Further, when the final display mode is the special mode, the display result of the variable display is always "off", so that the hold display displayed in the special mode is likely to change to the special mode (the second look-ahead effect described later). If there is no change (due to the look-ahead effect based on the pattern), the display result of the corresponding variable display will always be "off". Therefore, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the example shown in FIG. 47 (A), each display result (“missing”, “normal jackpot” or “probability change jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot” or “small hit”) shown in the winning judgment result is final. Judgment values (ratio) for determining the display mode are set, but different judgment values (ratio) may be set for "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot", and the display result is "normal". Even if it is a big hit, a probable big hit, a sudden probable big hit, or a small hit, if the ratio is small, the judgment value (ratio) is set so that the final display mode is determined as a special mode. You may. Further, for example, as in the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. 46, a determination value (ratio) for determining the final display mode may be set for each variation pattern shown in the winning determination result. By doing so, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display to be notified, the rate at which a highly expected reach effect is performed. Can also be raised. Further, when the final display mode is determined for each variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result, the final display aspect is determined to be the special aspect because the variation pattern indicated by the winning determination result is the winning determination result 2 (22) It may be only in the case of "non-reach off". By doing so, the hold display displayed in the special mode is likely to change to the special mode (due to the look-ahead effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern described later), but if it does not change, the corresponding variable display reaches. It will be out of place without being in a state. Therefore, it is possible to make a large difference in the content of the variable display and the display result depending on whether or not the display mode of the hold display displayed in the special mode changes, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

Further, in this embodiment, two types of display modes, a first special mode and a second special mode, are provided as the final display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided, respectively. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected according to the display result is different).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect pattern for the look-ahead effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a look-ahead effect pattern) (step S67107).

In this embodiment, as the look-ahead effect pattern, a first look-ahead effect pattern, a second look-ahead effect pattern, and a third look-ahead effect pattern are provided. In the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and at an arbitrary shift timing until the change display of the notice target is started. , It is displayed by changing from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and changes from the normal mode to the special mode at an arbitrary first shift timing. It is displayed by changing from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at an arbitrary second shift timing until the variable display of the notice target after the first shift timing is started. Further, in the third look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and any shift until the change display of the notice target is started. It is displayed by changing from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing.

The shift timing of the hold display is the timing at which a new change display is started. In the effect symbol change start process described later, the first hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c is deleted, and the remaining hold is held. This is the timing (specifically, the timing at which step S1800 is executed) in which the display is shifted one by one to update the total hold storage number display in the total hold storage display unit 18c. For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is deleted at the shift timing (that is, the timing when a new variation display is started). At the same time, the hold display displayed in the second position is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed in the third position is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth display area is displayed. The displayed hold display is shifted to the third display area, and the fifth display hold display is shifted to the fourth display area.

47 (B) and 47 (C) are explanatory views showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination table. In step S67107, the effect control CPU 101 selects a look-ahead effect pattern determination table based on the total number of reserved storages, and determines a look-ahead effect pattern using the selected look-ahead effect pattern determination table. Specifically, when the total number of reserved storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 selects the look-ahead effect pattern determination table (total number of reserved storages = 2) shown in FIG. 47 (B), and the total number of reserved storages. When is larger than 2, the look-ahead effect pattern determination table (total number of pending storages> 2) shown in FIG. 47 (C) is selected. In this embodiment, since the display mode changes in two stages (from the normal mode to the special mode and from the special mode to the special mode), the second look-ahead effect pattern is a hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified. If there is no shift timing at least twice or more, the hold display will be erased before all the changes are completed, and it cannot be executed. Therefore, when the total number of pending memories is 2 (that is, when the pending display corresponding to the latest winning determination result does not have two or more shift timings), the determination value is set so as not to be determined in the second look-ahead effect pattern. The set read-ahead effect pattern determination table (total number of pending storage = 2) shown in FIG. 47 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the selected look-ahead effect pattern determination table to set the look-ahead effect pattern as the first look-ahead effect pattern and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a ratio determined for each final display mode determined in step S67106. And one of the third look-ahead effect patterns is determined.

For example, when the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special mode or the second special mode and the total number of reserved storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect pattern at a rate of 100%. To determine the third look-ahead effect pattern. Further, when the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special mode and the total reserved storage number is larger than 2, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect pattern at a rate of 80% for the second look-ahead effect. The pattern is determined, and the third look-ahead effect pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the second special mode and the total reserved storage number is larger than 2, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect pattern at a rate of 60% for the second look-ahead effect. The pattern is determined, and the third look-ahead effect pattern is determined at a rate of 40%. Further, for example, when the final display mode determined in step S67106 is a special mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the look-ahead effect pattern as the first look-ahead effect pattern regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes is only the shift timing, but the timing is not limited to this, and for example, before the occurrence of reach during fluctuation or the first effect symbol is stopped. It may be possible to change at any timing such as before the previous and second effect symbols are stopped, during reach, and when the fluctuation is stopped. In this case, not only the number of shift timings to be changed but also the timing to be changed may be determined. Further, when the display mode of the hold display can be changed at an arbitrary timing, the second look-ahead effect pattern (that is, the display mode of the hold display changes twice even when the total number of hold storages is two. ) May be allowed to execute the look-ahead effect.

What is characteristic of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and 47 (C) is that the case where the final display mode is the second special mode is different from the case where the final display mode is the first special mode. 3 The determination value is set so that the ratio of the look-ahead effect pattern determined is high. By having such a feature, when the look-ahead effect is performed in the third look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changed to the special mode and displayed. ), When the look-ahead effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed after changing from the normal mode to the special mode, and further changed from the special mode to the special mode). In comparison, the rate at which the expectation of a big hit is finally changed to the second special mode higher than that of the first special mode and displayed is higher. Therefore, it is possible to make the degree of expectation of a big hit different for each look-ahead effect pattern, and it is possible to pay attention to which look-ahead effect pattern the look-ahead effect is executed. In this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is performed in the third look-ahead effect pattern, the second special mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the look-ahead effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern. It is set so that the ratio of the final change and display is high, but not limited to this, when the look-ahead effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the look-ahead effect is performed in the third look-ahead effect pattern. The rate of the final change and display in the second special mode, which is highly expected to be a big hit, may be higher than when it is performed. That is, the second look-ahead effect pattern may be expected to be a big hit than the third look-ahead effect pattern.

Further, what is characteristic of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 (C) is that the hold display of the special mode changes to a special mode as compared with the third look-ahead effect pattern in which the hold display of the normal mode changes to a special mode. The second look-ahead effect pattern to be used is more likely to be determined as the look-ahead effect pattern. By setting in this way, the ratio of the hold display in the special mode changed to the special mode and displayed is higher than that in the hold display in the normal mode. Therefore, the hold display in the special mode can be easily changed to the special mode as compared with the hold display in the normal mode, and the expectation when the hold display is displayed in the special mode can be increased.

In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is changed from the normal mode to the special mode and the hold display in the second look-ahead effect pattern are displayed. Is displayed on hold in the first timing in which the normal mode is changed to the special mode, the second timing in which the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the third look-ahead effect pattern. The timing at which is displayed after changing from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the notice target is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be timing. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during the variable display (a period spanning one variable display or a plurality of variable displays) that is executed before the variable display of the notice target is started. In this case, for example, even when the total number of reserved storages is 1, the look-ahead effect can be executed, and the second look-ahead effect pattern can be determined regardless of the total number of reserved memories, and the hold display is normally displayed at the start winning prize. It is displayed in a mode, and by the time the variable display corresponding to the hold display (hold information) is started, the normal mode is changed to the special mode and the display is changed, and the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode. May be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, three patterns of the first look-ahead effect pattern to the third look-ahead effect pattern will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the normal mode is changed to the first special mode, and the second special mode is further described. A pattern that changes to a mode, a pattern that changes from a normal mode to a special mode, a pattern that changes from a special mode to a first special mode, and further changes to a second special mode may be used. That is, a display mode of a plurality of stages of hold display having different expectations for a big hit is provided, and an upper limit is set on the number of changes in the look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the hold display is gradually changed and displayed. Absent.

When the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The determined change timing (shift count) is set in the shift count counter for specifying the change timing (shift count) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the notice target changes is the shift timing of the arbitrary hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (number of shifts), it is determined how many shifts are performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target to change the display mode. For example, if the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target.

48 to 51 are explanatory views showing a change timing determination table. In step S67108, the effect control CPU 101 selects and selects a change timing determination table based on the final display mode determined in step S67106, the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107, and the state of the pending display changing flag. The change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice is determined based on the change timing determination table and the total number of hold storages. Specifically, in the effect control CPU 101, the final display mode determined in step S67106 is a special mode, the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first look-ahead effect pattern, and the pending display changing flag is set. When not, the first look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table (when the hold display changing flag is not set) shown in FIG. 48 (A) is selected, and when the hold display changing flag is set, FIG. 48 (B). ) Is selected for the first look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table (when the flag is set while the hold display is changing). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target at a ratio determined for each total hold storage number in the selected first look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table. Determined to be one of 1 to 7.

Further, in the effect control CPU 101, the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second look-ahead effect pattern, the pending display changing flag is not set, and the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special. In the mode, the second look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIG. 49 (A) (when the flag during the pending display change is not set) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the first special mode from the special mode). When the final display mode determined in step S67106 by selecting the second change timing to the mode is the second special mode, the second look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIG. 49 (B) (during the pending display change). When the flag is not set) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the second change timing from the special mode to the second special mode) are selected. Further, when the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second look-ahead effect pattern and the hold display changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 is irrelevant to the final display mode determined in step S67106. First, the second look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIG. 50 (A) (when the flag is set while the hold display is changing) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the first special mode or the second mode from the special mode). The second change timing to the special aspect) is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines the first change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target at a ratio determined for each total number of hold storages in the selected second look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table. ) Is determined to be one of 1 to 6, and the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 2 to 7.

As described above, the second look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 50 shows the ratio of the determination values corresponding to the random numbers, and is actually, for example, 1 to 1000. When a random number is used, a determination value of 1 to 1000 corresponding to the random number is assigned. Therefore, for example, if the ratio of the determination values is 0.5 (first shift timing: 6, first shift timing: 7 in FIG. 49 (A)), determination values 1 to 5 are assigned. Further, in this embodiment, the first change timing and the second change timing are determined at the same time by using the second look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 50, but they are determined separately. You may do so.

Further, in the effect control CPU 101, the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the third look-ahead effect pattern, the pending display changing flag is not set, and the final display mode determined in step S67106 is the first special. In the mode, the third look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table (when the flag is not set during the hold display change) (change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode) shown in FIG. 51 (A) is selected, and step S67106 When the final display mode determined in is the second special mode, the third look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIG. 51 (B) (when the pending display changing flag is not set) (from the normal mode to the second special mode). Change timing) is selected. Further, when the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the third look-ahead effect pattern and the hold display changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 is irrelevant to the final display mode determined in step S67106. Instead, the third look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table shown in FIG. 51 (C) (when the flag is set while the hold display is changing) (the second change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode) is selected. .. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target at a ratio determined for each total number of hold storages in the selected third look-ahead effect pattern change timing determination table. Determined to be one of 1 to 7.

For example, when the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table (when the hold display changing flag is not set) shown in FIG. 48 (A) is used and the total number of hold storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 can be used. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%. Further, when the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table (when the flag is set during the hold display change) shown in FIG. 48B is used and the total number of hold storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 is set to 30. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 70%.

Further, for example, the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 49 (A) (when the flag being held and displayed is not set) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the mode from the special mode to the first special mode). When the second change timing) is used and the total number of pending storages is 4, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first change timing (number of shifts) to 1 and the second change timing (shift) at a rate of 30%. The number of times) is determined to be 2, the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 50%, the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 3, and the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 20%. ) Is 2, and the second change timing (number of shifts) is 3.

Further, for example, the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 49 (B) (when the flag being held and displayed is not set) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the special mode to the second special mode). When the second change timing) is used and the total number of pending storages is 4, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first change timing (number of shifts) to 1 and the second change timing (shift) at a rate of 50%. The number of times) is determined to be 2, the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 3, and the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 20%. ) Is 2, and the second change timing (number of shifts) is 3.

Further, for example, the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 50 (A) (when the flag is set during hold display) (the first change timing from the normal mode to the special mode and the first special mode or the second mode from the special mode). When the total number of pending storages is 4, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first change timing (number of shifts) to 1 and 2 at a rate of 20% when the second change timing to the special mode is used. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the first change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 3, and the first change is determined at a rate of 50%. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, and the second change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 3.

Further, for example, when the third look-ahead effect change timing determination table (when the flag during hold display is not set) (change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode) shown in FIG. 51 (A) is used, the total number of hold storages When is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 1 at a rate of 50%, and determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 2 at a rate of 50%. Further, for example, when the third look-ahead effect change timing determination table (when the flag being displayed on hold is not set) (change timing from the normal mode to the second special mode) shown in FIG. When is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 2 at a rate of 30%. Further, for example, when the third look-ahead effect change timing determination table (when the flag is set during hold display) (change timing from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode) shown in FIG. 51 (C) is used. When the total number of pending memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 1 at a rate of 30% and the change timing (number of shifts) to be 2 at a rate of 70%. To do.

What is characteristic of the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 is that when the hold display changing flag is set (that is, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, any hold display is a normal mode. When the hold display changing flag is not set (that is, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, one of the hold displays is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode) when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode. The determination value is set so that the rate at which the change timing is delayed (the number of shifts until the change timing is reached increases) is higher than when the change timing is not performed. By having such a feature, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the change timing of the newly executed look-ahead effect is changed. It tends to be determined late (the number of shifts until the change timing is likely to increase), and the rate of change after the hold display already displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode is erased increases. That is, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (for example, a special display) in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the hold display is different from the hold display displayed in the normal mode. The rate at which the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode (for example, special display) changes can be further increased. Therefore, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the hold display is likely to change to a display mode with a higher expectation of becoming a big hit, and thus pre-reading. It is possible to make people interested in the display mode of the hold display when the effect (suggestion effect) is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the look-ahead effect.

Further, what is characteristic of the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 is that when the final display mode is the first special mode, the second special mode is expected to be a big hit than the first special mode. The determination value is set so that the rate at which the change timing is delayed (the number of shifts until the change timing is reached increases) is higher than in the mode. By having such a feature, when the display mode of the hold display changes at an early timing (small number of shifts), the rate of change to the second special mode with high expectation of a big hit is increased. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the hold display changes (that is, the number of the hold display changes), and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 48 to 51, when the final display mode is the first special mode, the change timing is earlier than that in the second special mode (the number of shifts until the change timing is reached). The determination value may be set so that the ratio is high. In this case, if the display mode of the hold display changes at a later timing (a large number of shifts), it is possible to easily change to the second special mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. Further, in this embodiment, if the pending display changing flag is set, the same look-ahead effect change timing determination table (in this example, the second look-ahead effect pattern change in FIG. 50A) is changed regardless of the final display mode. The timing determination table (when the hold display changing flag is set) or the third look-ahead effect change timing determination table (when the hold display changing flag is set) in FIG. 51 (C) is used, but the hold display changing flag is set. Even when the table is displayed, a look-ahead effect change timing determination table to which determination values are assigned so that determination values are determined at different change timings may be used according to the final display mode.

In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the notice target is started, but from the start winning point. When the display mode can be changed at an arbitrary timing until the variable display of the advance notice target is started, for example, the timing to change (at the time of starting prize, a specific shift timing, during a specific variable display, etc.) is specified. A plurality of possible change timing patterns may be provided, and one of them may be selected according to the winning determination result.

Further, in this embodiment, regardless of which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won, the variable display is performed in the order of winning, and the high base (that is, the second starting winning opening 14 is won). Even in the state of (easy to do), the look-ahead effect can be executed based on winning a prize in either the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the process of determining the look-ahead effect pattern of the look-ahead effect determination process (step S67107) and the process of determining the change timing (step S67108), as shown in FIGS. 47 to 51, the first reserved storage number and the second The look-ahead effect pattern and the change timing are determined based on the total number of reserved memories, which is the sum of the number of reserved memories. However, as described above, when the execution of the look-ahead effect based on any of the start winnings of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is restricted according to the gaming state. For example, the variable display based on winning the second start winning opening 14 is given priority, and in the high base state, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on winning the first starting winning opening 13 is restricted, and the low base In the state, when the execution of the look-ahead effect based on winning the second start winning opening 14 is restricted, the process of determining the look-ahead effect pattern (step S67107) and the change timing are determined. In the process (step S67108), the look-ahead effect pattern and the change timing are determined based on the number of hold memories (first hold memory number or second hold memory number) for which the look-ahead effect is executed, not the total number of hold memory numbers. You may try to do it.

When the change timing (number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display (step S67110). In this embodiment, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change can be executed at the shift timing. In addition, the suggestion effect is the first effect mode (in this example, the characters "chance!" Are displayed in the elliptical frame) or the second effect mode (in this example, the characters "chance!" Are displayed in the rectangular frame). Is displayed). In step S67110, the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

In this embodiment, the hold display changes to a special mode, a first special mode, or a second special mode at different rates depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the display mode of the hold display changes at a higher rate than when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode. Although details will be described later, the suggestion effect is also executed at a shift timing other than the change timing of the hold display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between them, the suggestion effect executed at the change timing of the hold display is also called a suggestion effect (success pattern), and the suggestion effect executed at a shift timing other than the change timing of the hold display is suggested (failure). Also called pattern). In this embodiment, both the suggestion effect (success pattern) and the suggestion effect (failure pattern) are executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect mode determination table. In step S67110, the effect control CPU 101 uses the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 52 (A) to determine the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 20%, and determines the effect mode as the second effect mode at a rate of 80%.

What is characteristic of the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that in the change timing, the ratio of being determined in the second effect mode is higher than that in the first effect mode, and in the non-change timing, it is higher than that in the second effect mode. Also, the determination value is set so that the ratio determined in the first effect mode is high. By having such a feature, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to give diversity to the suggestion effect, and it is possible to pay attention to which effect mode the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 52, for example, when the value of any of the shift count counters stored in the winning determination result storage buffer is 0 or more, that is, the display mode of the hold display is scheduled to change. A suggestion effect mode determination table used when there is a problem may be further provided, and the determination value may be set so that the ratio of executing the suggestion effect (failure pattern) at the non-change timing is high. By doing so, even a suggestion effect (failure pattern) can be expected depending on the frequency of execution.

In addition, in this embodiment, the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect is suggested at different ratios, but the display mode of the hold display is different depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. It may be suggested at different ratios which display mode is changed. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode A (for example, the characters "chance!" In the elliptical frame are displayed in red), the first effect mode B (for example, the elliptical frame). The rate of change to the second special mode, which has a high expectation of a big hit, may be higher than that of the case where the character "chance!" Is displayed in white).

Further, in the suggestion effect, the hold display of any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage number display unit 18c is specified, and it is suggested that the display mode of the specified hold display may change. You may try to produce. In this case, the effect mode is determined using the suggestion effect mode determination table in which different determination values (ratio) are set according to which hold display is specified (state of the specified hold display). You may do so.

Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect is always executed at the shift timing when the display mode of the hold display changes, but the suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, it is possible to enhance the unexpected feeling.

Further, in this embodiment, two types of effect modes, a first effect mode and a second effect mode, are provided as the effect mode of the suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of effect modes are provided. , The degree of expectation that the display mode changes may be different (the rate of selection differs depending on whether or not the display mode is changed).

When the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold storage number display unit 18c to display a new hold display in the normal mode (step S67111). In step S67111, the effect control CPU 101 controls the new hold display to be displayed in the normal mode, and also includes data indicating the hold display mode (normal mode in this example) and the final display determined in step S67106. The data indicating the mode, the data indicating the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107, the shift number counter set in step S67108, and the data indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67110 are used as the winning determination result. It is stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (FIG. 44) in association with each other. By storing these data, it is possible to specify the final display mode determined by the look-ahead effect determination process, the look-ahead effect pattern, the change timing, and the suggestion effect mode in the effect symbol variation start process described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the winning determination result specification command is received, in the look-ahead effect determination process, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the content to be executed are determined, and a new hold display is displayed. A process for controlling the display in a normal mode is performed. In this embodiment, the change timing of the hold display in the look-ahead effect is not determined at the time of the start winning, but if it is allowed to be determined at the time of the start winning, a new hold display is set in step S67111. Is controlled to be displayed in a display mode (special mode or special mode) other than the normal mode.

In this embodiment, even when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode (or a special mode), or when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed in advance, a new mode may be added. It is permissible to execute the look-ahead effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted at a certain rate (for example, when one of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode). May be restricted from being executed in layers, or by restricting the execution of three or more look-ahead effects in layers). By making such a restriction, it is possible for the player to easily understand which hold display should be focused on.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the order of winning either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the variable display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is prioritized. When it is configured to execute, (1) it is configured to perform the look-ahead effect only for the variable display of the first special symbol, and (2) only the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. There are three possible configurations: one is to perform a look-ahead effect on the target, and (3) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to perform a look-ahead effect on a variable display. ..

When the configuration of (1) above is added to the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the shift count counter is based on the upper limit of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example). Is set to a maximum of 4. However, in the configuration of (1) above, even if the look-ahead effect of changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, if a prize is generated in the second start winning opening 14, the second 2 Since the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted (priority is given to the winning order), for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, even if it is the shift timing, the effect symbol described later is executed. It is desirable that the value of the shift count counter is not subtracted in step S1802 of the fluctuation start processing. Further, in the case of the configuration of (3) above, when the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also performed. Is preferably configured so that the value of the shift count counter is not subtracted in step S1802 of the effect symbol variation start processing described later.

Further, when the configuration of (2) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the shift is performed according to the upper limit of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example). A maximum of 4 is set in the count counter. In this case, unlike the configuration of (1) above, the value of the shift count counter is subtracted when the shift timing is reached, regardless of whether the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Further, in the same way, when the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the configuration of (3) above, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. Even when the fluctuation display is performed, the value of the shift count counter is subtracted when the shift timing is reached.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the pre-reading effect is not performed for the variable display of the first special symbol during the high base. You may. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the look-ahead effect based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 during the big hit game is not performed. May be good. In such a configuration, for example, during a high base or a big hit game, even if a prize is generated in the first start winning opening 13 in the game control microcomputer 560, the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed. It can be realized by not executing it, discarding the winning judgment result specification command received by the effect control microcomputer 560, or controlling not to execute the look-ahead effect even if it is decided to execute it. .. Further, when the configuration of (3) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the look-ahead based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 during the high base or the big hit game is performed. Although the effect is not performed, the look-ahead effect based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14 may be performed. In such a configuration, for example, during a high base or a big hit game, even if a prize is generated in the first start winning opening 13 in the game control microcomputer 560, the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed. Even if it is decided not to be performed, the winning judgment result specification command based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 received by the effect control microcomputer 560 is discarded, or the pre-reading effect is determined to be executed, the command is not executed. It can be realized by controlling in this way. Further, on the game control microcomputer 560 side, when the high base state or the big hit game is in progress, the execution of the winning effect processing (that is, the look-ahead effect) based on the start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 is restricted. In the case of the configuration, on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, only the look-ahead effect based on the start winning in the second start winning opening 14 can be executed in the high base state, and the first start winning opening in the low base state. Only the look-ahead effect based on the start winning in 13 can be executed (that is, in the low base state, the look-ahead effect is performed even if the winning judgment result specification command based on the start winning in the second start winning opening 14 is received. It may not be decided to execute).

When the configuration of (1) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the hold memory based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14 exists. When a prize is generated in the first start winning opening 13, the look-ahead effect for the reserved memory based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 may not be executed. Further, when the configuration of (1) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the look-ahead effect for the reserved memory based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 is performed. When a prize is generated in the second start winning opening 14 while the execution is decided, the execution of the pre-reading effect that has already been decided may be cancelled.

In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the order of winning any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the pre-reading effect is performed only for the variable display of the first special symbol (the above ((1) above. 1)), or a configuration ((2) above) in which the look-ahead effect is performed only for the variable display of the second special symbol may be added. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the order of winning any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, during the high base or the big hit game, the first start winning opening 13 is reached. It is also possible not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the prize.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. 40. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) instructing to stop all symbols, the effect symbol variation is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big hit game (step S805).

Process during big hit game (step S805): Control during big hit game or small hit game is performed. For example, the combination operation gate passage command transmitted in step S395 of the first large winning opening pre-opening process in FIG. 27 and the large winning opening opening designation command transmitted in step S403 of the large winning opening pre-opening process in FIG. 28. Alternatively, upon receiving the designated command after opening the large winning opening, which was transmitted in step S439 of the process during opening of the large winning opening in FIG. 30, the effect display device 9 performs an effect such as display control of the number of rounds. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S806).

Although not shown, a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening is transmitted between step S2462 and step S2463 of the small hit opening pre-processing in FIG. 32, and step S2489 of the small hit opening processing in FIG. 33. And step S2490, a designated command is transmitted after the big winning opening is opened. Even when these commands are received, the effect display device 9 performs an effect such as display control of the number of rounds.

Jackpot end effect processing (step S806): The effect display device 9 performs display control to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 40. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 53. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first winning determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer and various data associated with it. The contents of the winning determination result storage buffer are shifted, the first hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c is deleted, the remaining hold displays are shifted one by one, and the total in the total hold storage display unit 18c is added. The hold storage number display is updated (step S1800). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is deleted at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed in the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed in the fourth is the third display. It is shifted to the area, and the hold display displayed in the fifth position is shifted to the fourth display area. When the variation display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the effect control CPU 101 synchronizes with the variation display of the first special symbol. When the variation display of the effect symbol is executed (specifically, when the first symbol variation specification command reception flag is set), the first winning determination result storage buffer stores the first. The winning judgment result is deleted, and the contents of the first winning judgment result storage buffer are shifted. In addition, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the second prize is awarded. The first winning judgment result stored in the judgment result storage buffer is deleted, and the contents of the second winning judgment result storage buffer are shifted.

Next, in the effect control CPU 101, in the winning determination result storage buffer (see FIG. 44), the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (shift number) associated with any winning determination result is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is larger than 0 (step S1801). When the value of the shift count counter is larger than 0, it is determined that the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c. Is shown. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect (change the display mode of the hold display).

When the value of any of the shift count counters is not greater than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, the value of the shift count counter is 0 or not set, and the look-ahead effect is executed (the display mode of the hold display is changed). If it is not determined, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1803a.

On the other hand, when the value of the shift count counter is larger than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect (to change the display mode of the hold display), it is for effect control. The CPU 101 subtracts 1 from all the shift count counter values (step S1802). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the shift count counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1803). The fact that the value of the shift count counter becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the shift count counter value in step S1802 indicates that any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed. It indicates that it is time to execute the look-ahead effect to be changed. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display.

In step S1803, when the value of the shift count counter is not 0, that is, when it is not the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1803a. On the other hand, when the value of the shift count counter is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, the shift count counter whose value has become 0 is set to a state in which nothing is set (for example, Null). By performing such processing, it is possible to prevent the change timing (the value of the shift count counter is subtracted to 0) from being changed again in step S1803.

If it is allowed to change the display mode of the hold display at the time of winning the start, for example, the following process is performed to realize the change of the display mode of the hold display at the change timing. When the look-ahead effect pattern is the second look-ahead effect pattern, the first change timing is the start winning prize, and the second change timing is the first shift timing, the effect control CPU 101 is in step S67108 of the look-ahead effect determination process. The value of the 1 shift count counter is set to 0, and the value of the 2nd shift count counter is set to 1. Then, in step S67111 of the look-ahead effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display a new hold display in a special mode based on the value of the first shift number counter being 0, and the first Set the shift count counter to the state where nothing is set (for example, Null). By performing the processing in this way, in the effect symbol variation start process performed thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts only the value of the second shift count counter by 1 in steps S1801 and S1802 to set it to 0, and steps S1803. Then, based on the value of the second shift count counter becoming 0, it can be determined that it is the second change timing for changing from the special mode to the special mode.

In step S1803a, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a special mode or a special mode among the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c (step S1803a). ). For example, it can be confirmed by referring to the hold display mode of the winning determination result storage buffer (FIG. 44). The data indicating the hold display mode stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (FIG. 44) is registered in, for example, the look-ahead effect determination process, and is updated in step S1808 described later. When it is determined in step S1803a that there is no hold display displayed in the special mode or the special mode, the effect control CPU 101 holds the hold indicating that the hold display is displayed in the special mode or the special mode. If the display changing flag is set, it is reset (step S1803b). In this way, by updating the state of the holding display changing flag depending on whether any holding display is displayed in a special mode or a special mode, one of the holding displays is already in a mode other than the normal mode. When displayed in the display mode, the hold display displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode can be changed more easily than the hold display displayed in the other normal modes (look-ahead effect determination process, 46, 48-51).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1804).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives the effect symbol display result (that is, the received display result specification command) according to the variation pattern command read in step S1804 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area. The stop symbol) is determined (step S1805). That is, by executing the process of step S1805 by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 56, when the received display result designation command normally indicates a big hit (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 is used as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of the production symbols in which the three symbols are even-numbered symbols (usually stop symbols reminiscent of the occurrence of a big hit). When the received display result specification command indicates a probability variation jackpot (when the received display result specification command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 has 3 symbols as odd symbols as stop symbols (probability variation). Determine the combination of the production symbols that are aligned with the stop symbols) that reminds you of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, in the case of deviation (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, the combination of the effect symbols with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. If the received display result specification command suddenly indicates a probability change big hit or small hit (when the received display result specification command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 Determines the combination of production symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbol, the stop symbol reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. Further, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probabilistic jackpot is called a probabilistic jackpot symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal jackpot is called a normal jackpot symbol. A stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not executed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestion effect (failure pattern) executed when the display mode does not change is determined.

In step S1806, the effect control CPU 101 is shown in FIG. 52 (B) when the hold display changing flag is not set, that is, when any hold display is not displayed in a special mode or a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c. ) Indicates that the suggestion effect (failure pattern) is not executed, or is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode, at the ratio of the suggestion effect mode determination table (when the pending display changing flag is not set). To do. When the hold display changing flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode or a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c, the non-change timing suggestion effect shown in FIG. 52 (C). It is determined that the suggestion effect (failure pattern) is not executed, or is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode, at the ratio of the mode determination table (when the flag is set during the hold display change). In addition, although the determination value corresponding to the determination item (“no effect”, “first effect mode” or “second effect mode”) is assigned to the decision table of the suggestion effect mode determination table at the time of non-change timing, In the examples shown in FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (C), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect (failure pattern), and is assigned a determination value that matches the extracted random number (“No effect”, “No. 1”. "1 production mode" or "second production mode") is determined.

For example, when the hold display changing flag is not set, that is, when none of the hold displays is displayed in the special mode or the special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, the suggestion effect (failure pattern) is performed at a rate of 80%. It is determined not to execute, it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 15%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 5%. Further, when the hold display changing flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode or a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, a suggestion effect (failure pattern) is produced at a rate of 0%. Is determined not to be executed, it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 20%.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (C), in this embodiment, when the hold display changing flag is set, that is, in the total hold display unit 18c, any hold display is a special mode or a special mode. When it is displayed with, the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment. In this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed even at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect may not be executed. However, even in this case as well, it is desirable that the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold display is not displayed in a special mode.

Further, when the hold display changing flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode or a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, the final display mode of the hold display is the first. Depending on whether it is one special aspect or the second special aspect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be determined in the first effect mode A or the first effect mode B at different ratios. For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode in which the expectation is higher than that of the first special mode, the effect mode of the suggestive effect is determined to be the first effect mode A rather than the first effect mode B. The ratio may be increased.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the variation pattern of the determined suggestion effect (failure pattern) (step S1807). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1812).

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol, data indicating the mode of pre-reading effect in the total hold storage display unit 18c, and suggestion effect. Data and the like showing the mode of the above are described. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Note that the pre-reading effect described in the display control execution data of the process table used when the pre-reading effect is not executed is the data corresponding to the effect component that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set in the data indicating the aspect of.

The process table shown in FIG. 57 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 27R and 27L as production parts) is executed (step S1827). For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speakers 27R and 27L, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S1814), and processes the effect control process flag value during the effect symbol variation process (step S802). The value corresponds to (step S1815).

When it is determined in step S1803 that the value of any of the shift count counters is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display. If the middle flag is set, it is set (step S1808). Further, in step S1808, the effect control CPU 101 sets the shift number counter whose value has become 0 in the winning determination result storage buffer to a state in which nothing is set (for example, Null), and displays the corresponding hold. Update the data showing the aspect. For example, when the value of the first shift count counter becomes 0 and the value of the second shift count counter is 0 (that is, it is not the second look-ahead effect pattern), the corresponding hold display mode is the normal mode. To the display mode shown in the final display mode, and if the value of the second shift count counter is not 0 (that is, if it is the second look-ahead effect pattern), the corresponding hold display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. Update. Further, when the value of the second shift count counter becomes 0 (that is, if it is the second change timing of the second look-ahead effect pattern), the corresponding hold display mode is shown from the special mode to the final display mode. Update to the display mode. By executing such a process, in the look-ahead effect determination process, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the content based on the display mode of the currently displayed hold display.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1809). Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives the effect symbol display result (that is, the received display result specification command) according to the variation pattern command read in step S1809 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area. The stop symbol) is determined (step S1810).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table for changing the display mode according to the look-ahead effect pattern, the final display mode, the suggestion effect mode, and the variation pattern (step S1811). Then, the process proceeds to step S1812.

The process table for changing the display mode is a process table for changing the display mode of the effect symbol. At the start of the change of the effect symbol, a suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed, and a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of a specific hold display is executed. A table in which process data for control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of process tables for changing the display mode are provided according to the mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) to be executed and the mode of the look-ahead effect. Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) determined in the look-ahead effect determination process and stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (in this example, the first effect mode or the second effect mode). Based on the look-ahead effect pattern (in this example, any of the first look-ahead effect pattern to the third look-ahead effect pattern) and the final display mode (in this example, the first display mode or the second display mode). It is possible to specify in what mode the suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed and in which pre-reading effect is executed to change which hold display to what display mode. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 is one of a plurality of types of process tables for changing the display mode, depending on the effect mode, the look-ahead effect pattern, and the final display mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern), and the variation pattern. Is selected, and by executing the control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the process table for changing the selected display mode, the suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed in the effect mode determined by the look-ahead effect determination process. Then, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target to the determined display mode.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S1841) and 1 subtracts the value of the variation time timer (step S1842). When the process timer times out (step S1843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S1844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S1845).

Next, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S1849), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S1851). Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S1850), the process proceeds to step S1851. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, it shifts to the control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Even in such a case, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time elapses (at the end of the variation of the special symbol).

In this embodiment, a determination process including whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect based on receiving a winning determination result designation command is executed in the look-ahead effect determination process, but these processes are produced. It may be executed in the process during the symbol change. For example, in the effect symbol changing process, it is possible to execute a determination process including whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect by including a process of monitoring the winning determination result storage buffer.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S851), and resets the confirmation command reception flag if the confirmation command reception flag is set. (Step S852), control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol according to the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (step S853). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (step S855). Whether or not it is decided to be a big hit or a small hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. In this embodiment, it is also possible to confirm whether or not it is decided to make a big hit or a small hit by the determined stop symbol.

If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S856).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step). S857).

In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the variation (variable display) of the effect symbol on the condition that the symbol determination designation command is received (see steps S851 and S853). However, when the fluctuation time timer based on the received fluctuation pattern command times out, it may be controlled to end the fluctuation of the effect symbol without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the variable display.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot start 1 designation command has been received, and the jackpot start 2 designation command have been received). It is confirmed whether or not the large hit start 2 designated command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command is received is set (step S871). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, control is performed to display the game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (step S872).

In the present embodiment, a game start screen is displayed according to the type of hit, that is, whether it is a normal big hit, a probabilistic big hit, a sudden big hit, or a small hit.

In addition, the set flags (big hit start 1 designated command reception flag, big hit start 2 designated command reception flag, or small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag) are reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the jackpot game (step S805) (step S874).

In addition to the process process for displaying the big hit, a process process for displaying the small hit is provided. In the case of a small hit, for example, for a predetermined period (the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds). For a sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an effect similar to that at the time of sudden change jackpot may be performed.

Further, in the case of a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the effect control CPU 101 is used, for example, for a small hit / sudden probability change big hit, instead of executing the effect based on the reception of the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command. Based on the receipt of the fluctuation pattern command of, an effect suggesting that it is a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 switches the process data for performing an effect suggesting that it is a small hit or a sudden probability change large hit for each process time, and performs the effect according to the switched process data.

In step S872, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to display a screen notifying the start of the jackpot game.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S806) in the effect control process process. In the jackpot end effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S880). If the jackpot end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S885. If the jackpot end effect timer is not set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received (big hit end 1 designated command reception flag, jackpot end 2 designated command reception flag, small hit / sudden It is confirmed whether or not the probability change jackpot end designation command reception flag) is set (step S881). If the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag (big hit end 1 designation command reception flag, jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag, or small hit / sudden probability change jackpot end designation command reception flag) ) Is reset (step S882), a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end effect timer (step S883), and the jackpot end screen (screen notifying the end of the jackpot game) is displayed on the effect display device 9. Is controlled to be displayed (step S884). Specifically, the VDP109 is instructed to display the jackpot end screen.

Further, as described in step S163 of FIG. 31 and step S2163 of FIG. 34, the big hit end display time and the small hit end display time of the sudden big hit in the case of a low base are set to 12.3 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a high base, the jackpot end display time and the small hit end display time of the sudden jackpot are set to 1.1 seconds. In the present embodiment, a common jackpot end screen is displayed with the jackpot end display time and the small hit end display time of the sudden jackpot in the low base state. As a common jackpot end screen, a display indicating that the mode has been changed to the common mode is displayed. After that, the production of the common mode begins. The production of the common mode is a production in which it is unknown or difficult to understand whether or not the transition to the probabilistic state has occurred.

This makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the small hit has ended or the sudden big hit has ended due to the relatively long (12.3 seconds in this case) common big hit end screen, instead of the small hit. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the sudden jackpot has ended and the player may have shifted to the probabilistic state.

On the other hand, in the high base state, the high base state is maintained regardless of whether a sudden big hit occurs or a small hit occurs, so that the player has a sense of expectation at the end of the sudden big hit and the small hit. A relatively short (here, 1.1 seconds) common jackpot end screen is displayed without performing such a relatively long production.

In step S885, the value of the jackpot end effect timer is subtracted by 1. Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If it has not passed, the process ends. When the jackpot end effect time has elapsed, the effect control CPU 101 resets the look-ahead effect restriction flag if it is set (step S887).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

Next, a specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the effect display device 9, when three hold displays are displayed in the normal mode (“◯” in this example) on the total hold storage display unit 18c, the outlier symbol is displayed. When the derivation display is performed, a new variable display is started. Next, if the timing at which the hold display shift is performed is the change timing, the suggestion effect of the second effect mode (in this example, the characters "chance!" Is displayed in the rectangular frame) determined in advance. Is executed (FIG. 62 (B)). When the pre-determined pre-reading effect pattern is the third pre-reading effect pattern and the final display mode is the first special mode, the second hold display is the first special mode (in this example, "○"). When the final display mode is the second special mode, the second hold display is the second special mode (in this example). "○" is included in "○") and is displayed (FIG. 62 (C2)).

Further, when the predetermined look-ahead effect pattern is the first look-ahead effect pattern or the second look-ahead effect pattern, the second hold display is a special mode (in this example, "x" is displayed in "○". (Included) is displayed (FIG. 62 (C3)). Next, when the out-of-line symbol is derived and displayed (FIG. 62 (D)), a new variable display is started. Then, if the timing at which the hold display shift is performed is the change timing and the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) determined in advance is the second effect mode, the second effect mode (rectangular in this example). The suggestion effect (the characters "chance!" Is displayed in the frame) is executed (FIG. 62 (E1)). When the pre-determined pre-reading effect pattern is the second pre-reading effect pattern and the final display mode is the first special mode, the first hold display is the first special mode (in this example, "○"). When the final display mode is the second special mode, the first hold display is the second special mode (in this example). "○" is included in "○") and is displayed (FIG. 62 (F2)). Further, if the timing at which the new variable display is started and the hold display is shifted is the non-change timing and the effect mode of the determined suggestion effect (failure pattern) is the first effect mode, the first effect Although the suggestion effect of the mode (in this example, the characters "chance!" Is displayed in the elliptical frame) is executed (FIG. 62 (E2)), the display mode of the hold display does not change (FIG. 62 (F3)). )).

FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing the output of two jackpot signals. FIG. 63 (A) is a timing chart in the case of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. FIG. 63 (B) is a timing chart in the case of a small hit in the low base (in the time saving state). FIG. 63 (C) is a timing chart in the case of a small hit in the high base (in the time saving state).

With reference to FIG. 63 (A), in the case of a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, after the variation display of the effect symbol is derived and displayed (see the timing chart of the variation display), the symbol determination time (in the present embodiment, 0. After 5 seconds), it is determined that the symbol confirmation time has timed out in step S132 of FIG. Then, if it is a normal big hit or a probabilistic big hit, it is determined that the big hit flag is set in step S133 of FIG. 26, and the process to be executed shifts to the process before opening the first big winning opening in FIG. 27. As a result, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is not less than 5 in steps S1061 and S1062 of FIG. 39, and the output of the big hit 2 signal is started in step S1063, step S1102, and step S1103 of FIG. 39 (of the big hit 2 signal). See timing chart).

After that, when it is detected in step S391 of FIG. 27 that the game ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33 (see the timing chart of the combination operation gate 33), the opening of the special variable winning ball device starts in step S396. (Refer to the timing chart of the special variable winning ball device). Then, after the special variable winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (15 rounds in the present embodiment), it is determined that the jackpot round is completed in step S438 of FIG. 30 (timing of the special variable winning ball device). (Refer to the chart), when it is determined in step S165 of FIG. 31 that the time for displaying the end of the jackpot has elapsed (see the timing chart of the jackpot 2 signal), the process to be executed shifts to the special symbol normal process in step S173. As a result, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is less than 5 in steps S1061 and S1062 of FIG. 39, and the output of the jackpot 2 signal in steps S1102 and S1103 is stopped (see the timing chart of the jackpot 2 signal).

With reference to FIG. 63 (B), in the case of a small hit in the low base state, after the variation display of the effect symbol is derived and displayed (see the timing chart of the variation display), the symbol determination time (0 in the present embodiment). After .5 seconds), it is determined that the symbol confirmation time has timed out in step S132 of FIG. If it is a small hit, it is determined that the big hit flag is not set in step S133 of FIG. 26, it is determined that the small hit flag is set in step S147, and the process to be executed is the small hit of FIG. Move to pre-opening processing. As a result, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is not less than 5 in steps S1061 and S1062 of FIG. 39, and the output of the big hit 2 signal is started in step S1063, step S1102, and step S1103 of FIG. 39 (of the big hit 2 signal). See timing chart).

After that, each bad time of the symbol elapses, the process shifts to the small hit opening preprocessing, the output of the big hit 2 signal is started, and the opening of the special variable winning ball device is started in step S2467 of FIG. 32 (special variable). See the timing chart of the winning ball device). Then, after the special variable winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (two rounds in the present embodiment), it is determined that the small hit round is completed in step S2489 of FIG. 33 (of the special variable winning ball device). (Refer to the timing chart), when it is determined in step S2165 of FIG. 34 that the time for displaying the end of the small hit has elapsed (see the timing chart of the big hit 2 signal), the process to be executed shifts to the special symbol normal process in step S2166. .. As a result, it is determined that the special symbol process flag is less than 5 in steps S1061 and S1062 of FIG. 39, and the output of the jackpot 2 signal in steps S1102 and S1103 is stopped (see the timing chart of the jackpot 2 signal).

With reference to FIG. 63 (C), even when a small hit occurs in the high base state, two big hit signals are output as in the case of a small hit in the low base state shown in FIG. 63 (B). However, in the low base state, the small hit end display time is set to 12.3 seconds, whereas in the high base state, the small hit end display time is 1.1 in order to accelerate the digestion of the reserved memory. It is set to seconds. Therefore, in the low base state, after the special variable winning ball device is closed, two jackpot signals are continuously output for a longer period than in the high base state. Further, as described in steps S1050 to S1055 of FIG. 38, the big hit 1 signal is not output in the small hit state. As a result, it is possible to appropriately recognize whether or not the small hit state has occurred in either the high base state or the low base state.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the low base state, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the small hit is finished or the sudden big hit is finished, and the sudden big hit is finished instead of the small hit, and the probability change state. In order to give the player a feeling of expectation that it may have shifted to, the common jackpot end screen is displayed for a relatively long period (here, 12.3 seconds). did.

Further, as described above, in the high base state, the high base state is maintained regardless of whether a sudden big hit occurs or a small hit occurs, so that the player at the end of the sudden big hit and the small hit Since it is not necessary to give a feeling of expectation to the player, the common jackpot end screen is displayed for a shorter period (1.1 seconds in this case) than in the low base state.

In the case of a small hit, the output period of the big hit 2 signal is the period from the transition to the small hit opening process to the end of the small hit end process and the transition to the special symbol normal process. This is the period from the transition to the pre-opening processing of the first big winning opening to the completion of the jackpot end processing and the transition to the special symbol normal processing. Therefore, the output period of the big hit 2 signal is the small hit end display time and the big hit end display time (1.1 seconds for the high base, 12.3 for the low base) regardless of whether it is in the high base state or the low base state. Longer than seconds).

FIG. 64 is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden big hit and small hit. With reference to FIG. 64, FIG. 64 (A) shows a timing chart at the time of a sudden big hit, and FIG. 64 (B) shows a timing chart at the time of a small hit.

With reference to FIG. 64 (A), at the time of a sudden big hit, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step S125 of FIG. 25, and based on the command, an effect symbol indicating that the sudden big hit is made in step S853 of FIG. 59. By deriving and displaying the stop symbol of, it is notified that a sudden big hit has occurred.

The sudden jackpot start designation command is transmitted in step S135 of FIG. 26, and the jackpot display time is started in step S137, so that the jackpot display period of the sudden jackpot is started, and the player is prepared to aim at the combined operation gate 33. A small right-handed display is started to display. During this period, it is not determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the combined operation gate 33. That is, it is an invalid period of the combined operation gate 33. In addition, the right-handed display here is a display indicating that the combination operation gate 33 is aimed at.

When the jackpot display period elapses, it is started to determine whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning combination operation gate 33 in step S391 of FIG. 27. At the time of this start, a large right-handed display to aim at the combined operation gate 33 is started. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the combination operating gate 33, the opening of the large winning opening is started in step S396 of FIG. 27. It should be noted that it may be notified that the opening of the large winning opening is started between the passage through the winning combination operation gate 33 and the opening of the large winning opening.

Then, when it is determined that the opening and closing of the large winning opening is executed a predetermined number of times in FIGS. 28 and 29 and the opening of the large winning opening is completed in step S438 of FIG. 30, the small winning opening is opened in step S162 of FIG. The hit / sudden jackpot end specification command is sent, and the jackpot end display period starts. When the jackpot end display time elapses, the processing related to the sudden jackpot ends.

With reference to FIG. 64 (B), at the time of a small hit, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step S125 of FIG. 25, and based on the command, an effect symbol indicating that the small hit is made in step S853 of FIG. 59. By deriving and displaying the stop symbol of, it is notified that a small hit has occurred. In addition, the stop symbol of the effect symbol indicating that it is a small hit may be the same as the effect symbol indicating that it is a sudden big hit.

The small hit start designation command is transmitted in step S148 of FIG. 26, and the small hit display time is started in step S149 to start the small hit display period. It may be notified that the opening of the large winning opening is started between the small hit display period and the opening of the large winning opening. When the small hit display period elapses, the opening of the large winning opening is started in step S2467 of FIG.

Then, when it is determined that the large winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the opening of the large winning opening is completed in step S2489 of FIG. 33, the small winning opening is opened in step S2162 of FIG. The hit / sudden big hit end specification command is transmitted, and the small hit end display period is started. When the small hit end display period elapses, the processing related to the small hit ends.

[First Modified Example of First Embodiment]
In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning combination operation gate 33 even in the small hit, and when it passes, it is determined whether the small hit or the sudden big hit has occurred. Be notified. Specifically, it is as follows.

FIG. 65 is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden big hit and small hit in the first modification. With reference to FIG. 65, FIG. 65 (A) shows a timing chart at the time of a sudden big hit, and FIG. 65 (B) shows a timing chart at the time of a small hit.

With reference to FIG. 65 (A), at the time of a sudden big hit, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted, and based on the command, a stop symbol of the effect symbol common to the sudden big hit and the small hit is derived and displayed. , It is notified that a sudden big hit or a small hit has occurred.

When the sudden big hit start designation command is transmitted and the big hit display time is started, a common effect display period is started for both the sudden big hit and the small hit, and the player is prepared to aim at the winning combination operation gate 33. The display of the small right-handed display starts. During this period, it is not determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the combined operation gate 33. That is, it is an invalid period of the combined operation gate 33.

When the common effect display period elapses, it is started to determine whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33. At the time of this start, a large right-handed display to aim at the combined operation gate 33 is started. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the combined operation gate 33, it is notified that a sudden big hit has occurred. On the other hand, when the time T1 elapses after it is determined that the game ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33, the opening of the large winning opening is started.

Then, when the opening and closing of the big winning opening is executed a predetermined number of times and it is determined that the opening of the big winning opening is completed, the small hit / sudden big hit end designation command is transmitted, and the big hit end display period of the sudden big hit is transmitted. Is started. When the jackpot end display time elapses, the processing related to the sudden jackpot ends.

With reference to FIG. 65 (B), at the time of a small hit, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted, and based on the command, the production symbol common to the sudden big hit and the small hit shown in FIG. 65 (A) is stopped. By deriving and displaying the symbol (the common roll effect is executed), it is notified that a sudden big hit or a small hit has occurred.

When the small hit start designation command is transmitted and the small hit display time is started, a common effect display period is started for the sudden big hit and the small hit, and the player is prepared to aim at the combined operation gate 33. The small right-handed display of is started. During this period, it is not determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the combined operation gate 33. That is, it is an invalid period of the combined operation gate 33.

When the common effect display period elapses, it is started to determine whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination operation gate 33. At the time of this start, a large right-handed display to aim at the combined operation gate 33 is started. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the combined operation gate 33, it is notified that a small hit has occurred. On the other hand, when the time T2 elapses after the elapse of the common effect display period, the opening of the large winning opening is started.

Then, when the opening and closing of the large winning opening is executed a predetermined number of times and it is determined that the opening of the large winning opening is completed, the small hit / sudden big hit end designation command is transmitted and the small hit end display period starts. Will be done. When the small hit end display period elapses, the processing related to the small hit ends.

As a result, in the first modification, it is notified that the winning combination operation gate 33 is aimed even at the time of a small hit, and when the game ball passes through the combination operating gate 33 by the lapse of a predetermined time, it is suddenly determined. It is possible to notify whether a big hit has occurred or a small hit has occurred.

Even in such a case, since the special symbol process flag is updated in the same manner as in the first embodiment, two jackpot signals are output as described in the first embodiment (particularly FIG. 38). The flag.

[Second variant of the first embodiment]
In the second modification, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning combination operation gate 33 even in the small hit, and even when the game ball has passed, a small hit or a sudden big hit occurs. Do not notify if you have done so. Specifically, it is as follows.

FIG. 66 is a timing chart of the effect display at the time of sudden big hit and small hit in the second modification. With reference to FIG. 66, FIG. 66 (A) shows a timing chart at the time of a sudden big hit, and FIG. 66 (B) shows a timing chart at the time of a small hit.

The difference between FIG. 66 (A) of the second modified example and FIG. 65 (A) of the first modified example is that even if the game ball passes through the combined operation gate 33, it does not notify that a sudden big hit has occurred. , And, what is displayed during the end display period of the sudden big hit is not the end display of the sudden big hit, but the common end display for the sudden big hit and the small hit.

The difference between FIG. 66 (B) of the second modification and FIG. 65 (B) of the first modification is that even if the game ball passes through the combined operation gate 33, it does not notify that a small hit has occurred. And, what is displayed during the end display period of the small hit is not the end display of the small hit, but the common end display for the sudden big hit and the small hit described above.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in the second modification. With reference to FIG. 67, the jackpot end process of the second modification is different from the jackpot end process of FIG. 31 of the first embodiment when the jackpot type is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden jackpot in step S166. When it is determined in step S174 that the time saving state is not in progress, the time saving flag is left as it is (that is, a state indicating that the time saving state is not achieved) only by setting the probability change flag in step S175, and it is determined that the time saving state is in progress. When this happens, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set as in steps S170 and S171 of FIG.

As described above, in the second modification, even if the game ball passes through the combination operation gate 33 by the time when a predetermined time elapses, it is notified that the combination operation gate 33 is aimed at even in the case of a small hit. Even at the end of the sudden big hit and the small hit, it is not notified whether the sudden big hit has occurred or the small hit has occurred.

Further, even after the sudden big hit is completed, if the sudden big hit occurs when the time is not shortened, the time saving state is not controlled, and when the sudden big hit occurs while the time is shortened, the time is controlled. That is, when the sudden big hit is completed, the time saving state is controlled to be the same as the time saving state when the sudden big hit occurs. When the small hit is completed, the time reduction state is controlled to be the same as the time reduction state when the small hit occurs. Therefore, even after the end of the sudden big hit and the small hit, it is not notified whether the sudden big hit has occurred or the small hit has occurred.

Even in such a case, since the special symbol process flag is updated in the same manner as in the first embodiment, two jackpot signals are output as described in the first embodiment (particularly FIG. 38). The flag.

[Third variant of the first embodiment]
In the third modification, the one without the combination operation gate 33 shown in FIG. 1 and the combination operation switch 33a shown in FIG. 3 will be described.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the pre-processing for opening the first prize opening. With reference to FIG. 68, as compared with the first-time winning opening opening pre-processing described with reference to FIG. 27, in the modified example, the processing related to the combination operation gate 33 and the combination operation switch 33a is eliminated. Specifically, in FIG. 68, step S381, step S384, step S391, step S392, and step S395 in FIG. 27 are eliminated. As a result, not only the small hit, but also the normal big hit, the probability variable big hit, and the sudden big hit, the big hit round is started without the game ball passing through the winning combination operation gate 33.

[Fourth Modified Example of First Embodiment]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the effect symbol variation start processing. Further, FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the suggestion effect mode determination table. In the modified examples shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when the effect mode of the suggestion effect (failure pattern) at the non-change timing is determined in step S1806 of the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect. It is confirmed whether or not the mode is the second effect mode with high expectation and the pending change flag is set (step S1806a). Then, in the second effect mode and when the pending change flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 sets the suggestion effect restriction flag that limits the execution of the suggestion effect (step S1806b).

Further, in step S1806 of the effect symbol change start process, when the hold display changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 does not show in FIG. 70 (C1) according to the state of the suggestion effect restriction flag. Suggestion effect mode determination table at change timing (when the flag is set while the hold display is changing) (when the suggestion effect limit flag is not set), or the suggestion effect mode determination table at the time of non-change timing (flag during change display) shown in FIG. 70 (C2). (At the time of setting) (when the suggestion effect restriction flag is set) is used to determine the effect mode of the suggestion effect (failure pattern). As shown in FIGS. 70 (C1) and 70 (C2), when the suggestion effect restriction flag is set, it is restricted that the suggestion effect of the first effect mode, which has a lower expectation than the second effect mode, is executed. ing. By doing so, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode or a special mode, the expectation is inferior after the suggestion effect (failure pattern) of the second effect mode having a high expectation is executed. 1 It is possible to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (failure pattern) of the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent the person from not having a sense of expectation. Since the suggestion effect restriction flag set is reset at the same time as the holding display changing flag is reset (step S1803c), the holding display of the special mode or the special mode being displayed is deleted, and the holding display is newly special. When displayed in a mode or a special mode, the suggestion effect (failure pattern) of the first effect mode can be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 70, the suggestion effect mode determination table in which the determination values are set at the same ratio is used at the change timing regardless of the state of the suggestion effect restriction flag, but the change timing is not limited to this. However, the suggestion effect mode determination table in which the determination values are set at different ratios according to the state of the suggestion effect restriction flag (for example, the suggestion effect mode determination table used when the suggestion effect restriction flag is set is the first. (1) The determination value is set so as not to be determined by the effect mode and to be determined as no effect or the second effect mode).

[Summary of the first embodiment]
(1) As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the display result and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the time of starting winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning. It is provided with a specific determination means for determination. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 is realized by executing a look-ahead effect determination process, an effect symbol change start process, and the like, and is a hold display corresponding to the hold storage based on the determination result by the specific determination means (total hold storage). By changing the display mode (hold display on the display unit 18c) to a display mode other than the normal mode (in this example, the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode) and displaying the display, the variable display based on the hold memory becomes a big hit. A notice effect executing means for executing a look-ahead effect for notifying that there is a possibility, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes (may change). It has. Then, the advance notice effect executing means displays the hold display at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the displayed hold displays. One of them is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode and displayed. For example, when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode of the hold display is likely to change as compared with other hold displays. This is new depending on whether or not the hold changing flag indicating that any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed in a special mode or a special mode is set. Determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect at different ratios (decrease the ratio of newly executed look-ahead effects when set), and determining the change timing of the newly executed look-ahead effects at different ratios (set). When it is, it is realized by delaying the change timing (increasing the rate of change after the hold display displayed in the special mode or the special mode is erased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the display mode of the hold display when the look-ahead effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the look-ahead effect.

In this embodiment, when the hold changing flag is set (that is, one of the hold displays is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode) in the look-ahead effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. When), there is a hold display that is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode by making the ratio of executing the new look-ahead effect different or delaying the change timing of the newly executed look-ahead effect. In addition, it has been realized that the display mode of the hold display is more likely to change than that of other hold displays, but the realization method is not limited to this. For example, in the look-ahead effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed is determined for the latest winning result, and the final display mode (for example, the upper limit of change is set and changed). (It is not necessary) and the look-ahead effect pattern are determined, and in the effect symbol variation start process in which a new variation display is started, one of the display modes of the hold display is changed (and any display mode is changed). The display mode is changed based on the decision result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning judgment result in the look-ahead effect determination process). Then, in this configuration, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a hold display of the special mode in the effect symbol change start process, and if there is a hold display of the special mode, the normal mode is at a high rate. The hold display in a special mode rather than the hold display is determined as the target for which the display mode is changed. By doing so, when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the display mode can be changed more easily than the other hold display. .. Further, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process in which the look-ahead effect determination process is omitted and a new variation display is started, which of the corresponding hold display display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results. (For example, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the determination result at the time of each winning and the display mode after the change are determined) may be configured. Then, in this configuration, it is confirmed in the effect symbol change start processing whether or not there is a hold display of the special mode, and if there is a hold display of the special mode, a higher proportion of the hold display of the normal mode is used. By determining the hold display of the above as a target for changing the display mode, when there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the hold display is displayed in a display mode as compared with other hold displays. It can be made easy to change.

(2) Further, in this embodiment, the advance notice effect executing means has a plurality of types of special modes (for example, a first special mode or a second special mode) in which the hold display corresponding to the hold storage is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. Aspects. By changing to one of the special modes (details will be described later) and displaying the display, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display based on the hold storage becomes a specific display result. It is possible to execute a notice effect that announces that there is a different degree of expectation (for example, when the display is changed to the second special mode, compared to the case where the display is changed to the first special mode). , The rate of big hits is high, so expectations are high). Further, the advance notice effect executing means is different from the normal mode when the hold display displayed in the normal mode is changed to a special mode and displayed (when the pre-reading effect is executed based on the third look-ahead effect pattern). When the hold display displayed in the display mode (for example, a special mode; the first special mode may be included (details will be described later)) is changed to the special mode and displayed (second look-ahead effect). When the look-ahead effect is executed based on the pattern), it is changed and displayed in one of a plurality of types of special modes at different ratios (when the look-ahead effect is executed based on the third look-ahead effect pattern). , Compared to when the look-ahead effect is executed based on the second look-ahead effect pattern, the rate of change to the second special mode with high expectation is high). With such a configuration, the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result (big hit) can be announced with different expectations, so that the interest of the look-ahead effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the pre-reading effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed for the latest winning determination result and the final display mode (for example, change) In the effect symbol variation start process in which a new variation display is started by determining a look-ahead effect pattern (which does not have to be changed as an upper limit), which of the hold display display modes is changed (and which) Even when it is determined (whether to change to the display mode) and the display mode is changed based on the decision result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning judgment result in the look-ahead effect determination process). By determining the final display mode and the look-ahead effect pattern based on the winning determination result, the advance notice effect can be executed with different expectations, and when the normal mode is changed and when the special mode is changed. Can be displayed in different proportions in the first special mode or the second special mode. Further, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process in which the look-ahead effect determination process is omitted and a new variation display is started, which of the corresponding hold display display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results. (For example, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on each winning judgment result and the display mode after the change) are determined (for example, the display mode after the change is determined based on the winning judgment result). By determining, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect with different expectations. Further, by determining the display mode after the change based on the winning determination result and the display mode of the hold display, the first special mode or the first special mode or the first mode or the first mode is different at a different ratio between the time when the normal mode is changed and the time when the special mode is changed. 2 It can be changed and displayed in a special mode.

It should be noted that, among the plurality of types of hold display display modes used in this embodiment, the special mode may change to the special mode, and thus it has been described as being a different category from the special mode. , It may be positioned as the special mode with the lowest expectation of big hit, and may be in the same category as the special mode. That is, in this embodiment, the special mode and the special mode are described separately, and the look-ahead effect pattern displayed by changing from the special mode to the special mode (first special mode or second special mode) is the second look-ahead effect pattern. Although the effect pattern is used, in the look-ahead effect, the display mode may be changed from a display mode having a low jackpot expectation to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation, and the special mode may be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode. Alternatively, the first special aspect may be changed to the second special aspect having a higher expectation of a big hit.

(3) Further, in this embodiment, even if the hold display is changed to the special mode, it may not be changed from the special mode to the special mode after that (depending on the look-ahead effect based on the first look-ahead effect pattern), for example. Whenever it changes to a special aspect, it may be changed from the special aspect to the first special aspect or the second special aspect. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation when the display mode changes to a special mode.

(4) Further, in this embodiment, the notice effect executing means sets the display result of the variable display as a specific display result depending on which of the displayed hold displays is displayed by changing the display mode of the hold display. It is possible to perform a look-ahead effect that announces the possibility of becoming a (big hit) with different expectations. For example, when the change timing is early, the rate of change to the second special mode with a high jackpot expectation is high, and when the change timing is late, the rate of change to the first special mode with a low jackpot expectation is high. It is realized by determining the change timing so that Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed only up to two times, but the number of times that the display mode can be changed may be increased stepwise by increasing the types of display modes. .. In this case, when the change timing is early, there are many chances (for example, the number of shift timings) to change to a display mode having a higher expectation, so that the expectation can be increased. With such a configuration, the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result can be announced with different expectations, so that the interest of the look-ahead effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect determination process executed at the start winning, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed for the latest winning determination result and the final display mode (for example, change) In the effect symbol variation start process in which a new variation display is started by determining a look-ahead effect pattern (which does not have to be changed as an upper limit), which of the hold display display modes is changed (and which) Even when it is determined (whether to change to the display mode) and the display mode is changed based on the decision result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning judgment result in the look-ahead effect determination process). For example, for the hold display corresponding to the winning judgment result that is shown to be a big hit, by increasing the rate of change at an early stage (the stage where the number of shifts is small), any display mode of the hold display It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that gives a notice with different expectations depending on whether or not is changed. Similarly, in the effect symbol variation start process in which the look-ahead effect determination process is omitted and a new variation display is started, which of the corresponding hold display display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results. Even if the configuration is determined (for example, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the display mode after the change are determined based on each winning determination result), the winning determination result is shown to be a big hit. By increasing the rate of change at an early stage (the stage where the number of shifts is small), it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that gives a different expectation depending on which hold display display mode changes. Is.

(5) Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode and a plurality of stages of display modes (special mode, first special mode, and second special mode) different from the normal mode. When the notice effect executing means has a hold display displayed in a display mode (special mode or first special mode) different from the normal mode among the displayed hold displays, the notice effect execution means has a high proportion of the normal mode. Displays the hold display displayed in a different display mode by changing it to a display mode (first special mode or second special mode) at a higher stage than the current stage. This is new depending on whether or not the hold changing flag indicating that any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed in a special mode or a special mode is set. Determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect at different rates (decrease the rate of new execution when set), and determining the change timing of the newly executed look-ahead effect at different rates (set). In addition to delaying the change timing (increasing the rate of change after the hold display displayed in the special mode or the special mode is erased), the change from the special mode to the special mode is displayed. This is realized by the fact that the two-look-ahead effect pattern is determined at a higher rate than the third look-ahead effect pattern that is displayed by changing from the normal mode to the special mode. With such a configuration, if there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the hold display is likely to change to a display mode higher than the current stage. It is possible to enhance the interest of look-ahead production.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect determination process executed at the start winning, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed for the latest winning determination result and the final display mode (for example, change) In the effect symbol variation start process in which a new variation display is started by determining a look-ahead effect pattern (which is set as the upper limit and does not have to be changed), which of the hold display display modes is changed (and which) Even when it is determined (whether to change to the display mode) and the display mode is changed based on the decision result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning judgment result in the look-ahead effect determination process). , Check if there is a special mode hold display in the effect symbol change start process, and if there is a special mode hold display, a higher percentage of the special mode hold display than the normal mode hold display. A display different from the normal mode by determining the display mode as an object to be changed and by setting the ratio of the second look-ahead effect pattern to be determined higher than that of the third look-ahead effect pattern in the look-ahead effect determination process. If there is a hold display displayed in a mode, the rate at which the hold display changes to a display mode higher than the current stage can be increased. Further, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process in which the look-ahead effect determination process is omitted and a new variation display is started, which of the corresponding hold display display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results. (For example, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the judgment result at the time of each winning and the display mode after the change is determined), the effect symbol change start process determines the hold display of the special mode. By confirming whether or not there is, and if there is a hold display of a special mode, a higher percentage of the hold display of the special mode is determined as a target for changing the display mode than the hold display of the normal mode. When there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the mode, the rate at which the hold display changes to a display mode higher than the current stage can be increased.

(6) Further, in this embodiment, the notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in which the hold display is changed to one of a plurality of types of special modes different from the normal mode and displayed. .. In addition, the display mode of the hold display includes a special mode that is likely to change to a special mode as compared with the normal mode. Then, the notice effect executing means is when the hold display displayed in the normal mode is changed to the special mode and displayed, and when the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed to the special mode and displayed. , Change and display in one of a plurality of types of special modes at different ratios. For example, when the hold display displayed in the normal mode is changed to the special mode and displayed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed to the special mode and displayed. The rate of change to the second special aspect is high. According to such a configuration, the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result can be announced with different expectations, and the interest of the advance notice effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect determination process executed at the start winning, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed for the latest winning determination result and the final display mode (for example, change) In the effect symbol variation start process in which a new variation display is started by determining a look-ahead effect pattern (which does not have to be changed as an upper limit), which of the hold display display modes is changed (and which) Even when it is determined (whether to change to the display mode) and the display mode is changed based on the decision result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning judgment result in the look-ahead effect determination process). By determining the final display mode and the look-ahead effect pattern based on the winning determination result, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is changed to the special mode and displayed, and the display is displayed in the special mode. It is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a different ratio from the time when the hold display is changed to the special mode and displayed. Further, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process in which the look-ahead effect determination process is omitted and a new variation display is started, which of the corresponding hold display display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results. (For example, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on each winning judgment result and the display mode after the change) are also determined, and the winning judgment result and the display mode of the hold display are used. By determining the display mode after the change based on the change, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is changed to the special mode and displayed, and the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed to the special mode and displayed. It is possible to change and display the first special mode or the second special mode at different ratios.

(7) Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means has a plurality of types of suggestion effects (of the first effect mode or the second effect mode) that suggest the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change with different expectations. (Suggestion effect) can be executed, and when the suggestion effect of a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, the suggestion effect of the second effect mode) is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, but the display mode of the hold display does not change. A suggestion effect limiting means for limiting the execution of a suggestion effect having an expectation degree lower than a predetermined expectation degree (for example, a suggestion effect of a first effect degree having a lower expectation degree than the second effect degree) is provided. For example, the suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, but the suggestion effect limit flag is set when the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the second effect mode is set while the suggestion effect limit flag is set. It is restricted to perform the suggestion effect of the first effect mode, which has a lower expectation of changing than. Further, the suggestion effect restriction flag is reset when the hold display displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode is deleted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a feeling of anticipation from being lost.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect determination process executed at the start winning, whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed for the latest winning determination result and the final display mode (for example, change) In the effect symbol variation start process in which a new variation display is started by determining a look-ahead effect pattern (which is set as the upper limit and does not have to be changed), which of the hold display display modes is changed (and which) Even when it is determined (whether to change to the display mode) and the display mode is changed based on the decision result (that is, the change timing is not determined for each winning judgment result in the look-ahead effect determination process). , Which display mode is to be changed (and which display mode is to be changed), and the possibility that the display mode of the hold display is changed by determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion effects that suggest with different expectations. Further, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process in which the look-ahead effect determination process is omitted and a new variation display is started, which of the corresponding hold display display modes is changed based on all the winning determination results. (For example, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the display mode after the change are determined based on the judgment result at the time of each winning), the display mode of any of the corresponding hold displays is changed. By determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects that suggest the possibility that the display mode of the hold display may change with different expectations.

(8) Further, in this embodiment, it is allowed that the look-ahead effect is executed in an overlapping manner, and it is also allowed that the display modes of the plurality of hold displays are changed at the same time, but they are allowed to change at the same time. You may try to limit it. For example, when the change timing of the new look-ahead effect is determined, the data indicating the change timing of the pre-reading effect determined earlier is referred to the winning determination result storage buffer, and if the change timing is the same, a new one is used. The change timing of the look-ahead effect may be redetermined. By doing so, the display modes of the plurality of hold displays can be changed at the same time, so that each effect can be focused on.

(9) Further, in this embodiment, as a suggestion effect, a predetermined display control is performed in the effect display device 9, but together with (or instead of this), an effect of outputting sound from the speaker and an effect The effect of turning on the lamp may be performed.

(10) As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 63 and the like, when the small hit state is controlled in the advantageous gaming state (high base state) which is advantageous for the player, and the disadvantageous game which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state. Two big hit signals are output so that the period after the special variable winning ball device changes from the open state to the closed state differs depending on whether the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the small hit state in the state (low base state).

As a result, the big hit 2 signal can be appropriately output to the outside of the game machine when the small hit state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the small hit state is controlled outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as an example of what can be recognized externally, the occurrence ratio of a small hit and a sudden big hit in a low base or a high base, the number of small hits in a low base or a high base, and the like can be considered.

In the above-described embodiment, the two big hit signals output in the small hit state are output longer in the low base state than in the high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output may be performed at different times, and the high base state may be output longer than the low base state.

In addition, the timing at which the output of the jackpot 2 signal is stopped differs between the high base state (advantageous gaming state) and the low base state (unfavorable gaming state). However, the combination of the advantageous gaming state and the disadvantageous gaming state is not limited to the combination of the high base state and the low base state, and may be a combination of the high probability state and the low probability state, and the time saving state and the non-time saving state. It may be a combination with a time saving state.

Further, the following can be considered as the effect of being able to externally identify that a small hit or a sudden big hit has occurred in either the advantageous gaming state or the unfavorable gaming state.

When a sudden big hit or a small hit occurs in an advantageous gaming state (for example, high base) and the player is not notified of which one has occurred as in the second modification described above, a relatively short end display period (this implementation). In the form of (1.1 seconds), a sudden big hit or a small hit occurs in an unfavorable gaming state (for example, low base), and the player is notified of which one has occurred as in the second modification described above. If this is not done, the end display period is relatively long (12.3 seconds in the present embodiment), which gives the player the expectation that it is a sudden big hit and may shift to a probable change state. In such a case, if only small hits that do not shift to the probabilistic state occur, the player is stressed. Further, if a relatively long end display period is set for notification of a small hit, the period until the next big hit occurs becomes long, and the interest of the game is lowered.

In the present embodiment, since it is possible to externally identify whether a small hit or a sudden big hit has occurred in either the advantageous gaming state or the unfavorable gaming state, the playground side is the player based on the identified information. By being able to know the game situation in more detail, it is possible to prevent the player from being overstressed.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed as in the present embodiment, and unlike the present embodiment, the reserved memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested. For the 1 special symbol, the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment are performed, and for the 2nd special symbol, only the big hit judgment is performed without the small hit judgment, or the big hit judgment is performed and the small hit judgment is extremely low probability. In the case of performing in, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is almost executed during the high base, it is difficult to make a small hit, but when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed. If there is a hold memory, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

In this case, as in the above-described embodiment, by shortening the end display time of the small hit during the high base as compared with the low base, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of the small hit in the high base. Can be done.

(11) The advantageous gaming state is a state in which a trigger for outputting two big hit signals is more likely to occur than in the disadvantageous gaming state, and as described with reference to FIG. 63 and the like, when the small hit state is controlled in the advantageous gaming state. In the unfavorable game state, the output period of the big hit 2 signal is shorter than when the small hit state is controlled.

In the advantageous gaming state, an opportunity to output two big hit signals is likely to occur, so that the interval controlled to the small hit state is shortened. As a result, in the advantageous gaming state in which the trigger for outputting the big hit 2 signal is likely to occur when the small hit state is controlled, the period during which the big hit 2 signal is output when the small hit state is controlled is It will be shortened. As a result, the big hit 2 signal output when the small hit state is controlled continues until the timing when the big hit 2 signal output when the next small hit state is controlled is output. Can be suppressed.

(12) A combination operating gate 33 provided in the game area 7 is further provided, and based on the fact that the game ball has entered the combination operation gate 33, the game ball is controlled by a sudden big hit, while the game ball is inserted into the combination operation gate 33. It is controlled to a small hit state, not based on the entry of.

As a result, the game is not monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by determining whether or not the game ball is allowed to enter the combined operation gate 33 as an opportunity to be controlled to the specific game state, the player actively determines whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit. Can be identified.

As described in FIG. 68 of the first modification of the first embodiment, even when the combination operating gate 33 is not provided, the small hit state is the same as the effect described in (10) above. As a result of being able to appropriately output the two big hit signals to the outside of the gaming machine, the effect of being able to appropriately recognize a specific gaming state such as a small hit state outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is achieved.

(13) Further, as described in the first modification and the second modification of the first embodiment, a common result is obtained as an effect related to the time when the sudden big hit is controlled and the time when the small hit is controlled. The effect, the common effect display, the notification that the combination operation gate 33 is aimed at, and the common end display are executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect with a sudden big hit and a small hit.

The related production is not limited to the exact same production, and may be different production as long as it reminds the player of both the sudden big hit and the small hit. The production that reminds the player of both the sudden big hit and the small hit means, for example, a production in which the concept of the production and the idea received from the production are common.

Character A and character B, which are strongly related to each other and remind us of the other when one appears, are used to perform an effect of causing character A to appear in the case of a small hit, and character B to appear in the case of a sudden big hit. The effect may be executed as a related effect.

Further, the related effect may be an effect in which the base colors are the same or similar. For example, even if the background color is the same or similar, the characters that appear are the same or similar, or the displayed message is the same or similar. Good. The basic color is the color that is the center (main part) of the production. Similar colors are colors that share the same beauty (impression) that is created through the visual sense of the player who is the consumer.

Further, the related production may be a production in which the type, category, genre, category, etc. to which the content of the production belongs are common. For example, a production that uses normal ski hills as a theme and a production that uses large hills as a theme, which are common in terms of ski jumping competitions, and whether or not task A is achieved and whether or not task B is achieved. It may be a common production in that it is a mission production of whether or not to achieve a predetermined mission, such as the production of.

Further, the timing at which such a related effect is executed is not limited to the start of the winning round, and the effect symbol may be changing, or the invalid period of the combined operation gate 33 ends from the change stop. It may be up to, during the winning round, or at the end of the winning. As a related effect at the end of the hit, the transition to the common mode may be notified.

Further, as a related effect, the same or similar notice or reach may be executed in common during the fluctuation display, or the same or similar in common or similar from the suspension of fluctuation to the valid period of the combination operation gate 33. The effect may be executed, a common effect mode may be executed after a sudden big hit and a small hit, or these or the above-mentioned effects may be combined and executed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the output of the big hit 2 signal is started is the same for both the big hit and the small hit. However, the timing may be different.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in steps S106 to S1063 of FIG. 39, the output of the jackpot 2 signal is started based on the value of the special symbol process flag. That is, the output is started after the two big hit signals shift to the first big winning opening pre-opening process of FIG. 27 or the small hit opening pre-processing of FIG. 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output of the jackpot 2 signal may be started at another timing. Other timings may be, for example, the timing at which the big hit display time or the small hit display time starts or elapses, or the timing at which the special variable winning ball device of the big winning opening is opened. However, it may be the timing when the game ball passes through the combination operation gate 33 when it is not the invalid period of the combination operation gate 33, or the timing when the big hit end display time or the small hit end display time has elapsed. It may be before or after a predetermined time of these timings.

In addition, the output of the jackpot 2 signal is stopped based on the value of the special symbol process flag. That is, when shifting from the big hit end process of FIG. 31 or the small hit end process of FIG. 34 to the special symbol normal process of FIG. 21, the output of the big hit 2 signal is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output of the jackpot 2 signal may be stopped at other timings. Other timings may be, for example, the timing at which the big hit end display time or the small hit end display time has elapsed, or the timing at which the special variable winning ball device at the big winning opening is closed. It may be the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the output of the jackpot 2 signals is started.

(16) In the above-described embodiment, two jackpot signals are output according to the value of the special symbol process flag. As a result, the length of the end display of the small hit is longer in the high base than in the low base, and as a result, the big hit 2 signal is shorter in the high base than in the low base.

However, the length is not limited to this, and the lengths of the two jackpot signals may be directly different depending on the base state. For example, the lengths of the big hit 2 signals in the small hit state in the high base and the low base may be x seconds and y seconds, respectively, and x <y or x> y may be set.

(17) Signals such as the jackpot 2 signal output from the terminal board 160 may be directly transmitted to a management device such as a hall computer and a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp. It may be transmitted via a relay device.

(18) In the above-described embodiment, the signals such as the jackpot 2 signal output from the terminal board 160 are turned on when the target event occurs. However, the signal is not limited to this, and the signal may be turned off when the event of interest occurs.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, two sets of a large winning opening and a special variable winning ball device are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be one set or two or more sets. In addition, when two sets of a big winning opening and a special variable winning ball device are provided and two sets are opened alternately as the round progresses depending on the type of hit (for example, in the case of a probabilistic big hit and a normal big hit), Even if the round progresses, there may be a case where only one of the pairs is opened (for example, a sudden big hit and a small hit).

(20) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in step S2471 of FIG. 32, the winning number counter is reset to 0 each time the special variable winning ball device is opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning number counter may be continuously counted without resetting the winning number counter every time the special variable winning ball device is opened over a plurality of rounds.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in steps S2485 and S2491 of FIG. 33, even if the number of winnings to the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), in the next round, The big prize opening is now open. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of winnings to the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number by continuously counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening as shown in (10) above. , In the following rounds, the big prize opening may not be opened.

(22) In the above-described embodiment, the process of step S1063 and step S1064 of FIG. 39 may be executed between step S1052 and step S1054 of FIG. 38.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 38, two big hit signals are output when the sudden big hit is controlled and when the small hit is controlled. .. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit 2 signal is output not from the opening to the closing of the big winning opening, but from before the big winning opening is opened to after it is closed. is there. In other words, the period during which the big hit 2 signal is output is not only during the opening period of the big winning opening, but also during the preparation period for opening the big winning opening and from the closing of the big winning opening until the next variable display becomes possible. Including the period.

[Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, the mode of the look-ahead effect is made different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, in the second embodiment, a part different from the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead effect determination process. In the look-ahead effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the look-ahead effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted is set (step S67101). The look-ahead effect restriction flag is set in step S67111, which will be described later. If the look-ahead effect restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the total hold storage display unit 18c in the normal mode (step S67116). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode. ..

If the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 determines the past winning determination result stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (the winning determination result indicated by the winning determination result specification command received this time). All (excluding) are extracted (step S67102).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the extracted winning determination results are determination results indicating "non-reach" (step S67103). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 has a value (specifically, a value indicating that the variation pattern of all the extracted winning determination results in step S67103 is "shortened non-reach out" or "non-reach out". Is "01 (H)" or "02 (H)". See FIG. 16) (that is, it is confirmed whether or not the variation is out of reach without reach).

When all the winning determination results extracted in step S67103 are determination results indicating "non-reach", the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S67104. On the other hand, when all the extracted winning determination results are not determination results indicating "non-reach", the effect control CPU 101 normally displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the total hold storage display unit 18c. It is displayed in an aspect (step S67116). That is, in this embodiment, when there is a hold memory in which a variable display accompanied by a reach effect is performed, the look-ahead effect is not executed based on the newly received winning determination result designation command. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 71, even if there is a hold memory in which a variable display accompanied by a reach effect is performed, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the newly received winning determination result specification command. You may.

In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the latest winning determination result (the winning determination result indicated by the winning determination result specification command received this time) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the extracted winning prize. Based on the time determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect (step S67104).

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect using the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A).

FIG. 72 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a look-ahead effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead effect execution decision table, judgment values corresponding to determination items (“execute the look-ahead effect” or “do not execute the look-ahead effect”) are assigned to each winning judgment result, and FIG. 72 (A) shows. In the example shown in, the percentage of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and a determination item (“executes the look-ahead effect” or “executes the look-ahead effect”) to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned. "Do not execute look-ahead effect") is decided. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), the numerical values corresponding to "execute the look-ahead effect" and "do not execute the look-ahead effect" in each winning determination result are "execute the look-ahead effect" as a decision item. Alternatively, the percentage (%) at which "Do not execute look-ahead effect" is selected is shown.

In this embodiment, in addition to the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A), the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 72 (B), the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73, and FIG. 74. Judgment values are actually assigned to the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown and the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 75, but the ratio of the determination values assigned to simplify the explanation is shown. There is. Further, in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, S67110, and S67115 in which these tables are used, the effect control CPU 101 also uses, for example, the final display mode, the look-ahead effect pattern, and the change timing (number of shifts), as in step S67104. ) Or, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect is extracted, and a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

In step S67104, the effect control CPU 101 performs a look-ahead effect at a ratio determined for each winning effect determination result in the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A) based on the extracted latest winning result. Decide whether to do it. For example, when the winning determination result indicates that the result is "out of shortened non-reach", the effect control CPU 101 determines that the look-ahead effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, for example, when the winning determination result indicates that the result is "per pseudo-ream 3 supermarket", the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the look-ahead effect at a rate of 99%.

What is characteristic of the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A) is that it is displayed as compared with the case where the display result is "off" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 designation to the winning judgment result 7 designation). When the result is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 8 designation to the winning judgment result 12 designation), the judgment value is set so that the pre-reading effect is executed at a higher rate. It is set. Further, what is characteristic of the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 72 (A) is that even if the display result is the same, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed (for example, the super reach is performed rather than the normal reach). The judgment value is set so that the rate at which the look-ahead effect is executed is high. By having such a feature, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice is higher than when the look-ahead effect is not executed, and it is expected to be a big hit. It is possible to increase the proportion of reach production with a high degree. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the look-ahead effect is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at a rate of 1% even when the judgment result at the time of winning is "non-reach out", but "non-reach" ("shortening non-reach"). In the case of "out of reach" or "out of reach"), it may not be determined to execute the look-ahead effect. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), a determination value (ratio) for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is set for each fluctuation pattern shown in the winning determination result. Judgment value (ratio) for determining whether to execute the look-ahead effect for each display result (for example, "missing", "normal big hit" or "probability big hit" or "suddenly probable big hit" or "small hit") May be set.

Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the look-ahead effect (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the look-ahead effect (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 displays a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the total hold storage display unit 18c in the normal mode. (Step S67116).

In step S67105a, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total number of hold storages in the effect total hold storage counter for specifying the hold display that is the target of the look-ahead effect (step S67105a). The value of the total hold storage counter for the effect is decremented by 1 in step S1802a of the effect symbol variation start process, and is used in step S1811 to specify the hold display to be the target of the look-ahead effect. For example, when the value of the total hold storage counter for effect is 4, a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the fourth hold display of the total hold storage display unit 18c is executed. In this embodiment, the total reserved storage number is the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area and the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area. It is calculated by adding up. The first hold storage number is updated in step S652 after receiving the first hold storage number designation command, and the second hold storage number is updated in step S655 after receiving the second hold storage number designation command. Therefore, the total number of pending storages is also updated at the same timing. Further, the winning determination result designation command is transmitted after the first hold storage number designation command is transmitted in step S1218 of the start port switch passing process, and the second hold storage number designation command is transmitted in step S1228. Will be sent later. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the winning determination result designation command after updating the total pending storage number.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is finally displayed in the look-ahead effect (step S67106). In this embodiment, in addition to the normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided as display modes of the hold display. However, as will be described later, the hold display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode by the time the variable display based on the hold information corresponding to the hold display is started. Is displayed. Therefore, in step S67106, the final display mode is determined to be either the first special mode or the second special mode. Hereinafter, the first special aspect and the second special aspect may be collectively referred to as a special aspect.

FIG. 72 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table. In step S67106, the effect control CPU 101 finally determines which display mode to display (hereinafter, also referred to as the final display mode) using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 72 (B). Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each winning judgment result (display result of variable display) in the final display mode determination table based on the extracted latest winning determination result. For example, when the winning judgment result indicates that the display result of the variable display is "missing" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 designation to the winning judgment result 7 designation), the effect control CPU 101 , The final display mode is determined as the first special mode at a rate of 80%. Further, for example, when the winning judgment result indicates that the display result of the variable display is "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot" (corresponding to winning judgment result 8 designation to winning judgment result 12 designation). The effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the second special mode at a rate of 80%.

What is characteristic of the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 72 (B) is that the display results are displayed as compared with the case where the display result is "off" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 designation to the winning judgment result 7 designation). When the result is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 8 designation to the winning judgment result 12 designation), it is judged that the ratio determined in the second special mode is higher. The value is set. By having such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display to be notified is higher than when the hold display is displayed in the first special mode. can do. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation that the display in the second special mode will be a big hit than in the first special mode, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed when the look-ahead effect is executed. Can be focused on.

In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), each display result (“missing”, “normal jackpot” or “probability change jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot” or “small hit”) indicated by the winning judgment result is final. A determination value (ratio) for determining the display mode is set. For example, as in the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. 72 (A), the final display mode is set for each variation pattern shown in the winning determination result. A determination value (ratio) for determining the above may be set. By doing so, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display to be notified, the rate at which a highly expected reach effect is performed. Can also be raised.

Further, in this embodiment, two types of display modes, a first special mode and a second special mode, are provided as the final display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided, respectively. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected according to the display result is different).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect pattern for the look-ahead effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a look-ahead effect pattern) (step S67107).

In this embodiment, a first look-ahead effect pattern and a second look-ahead effect pattern are provided as the look-ahead effect pattern. In the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be announced is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed in the special mode once. In the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the change display (hold information) of the notice target is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning, and the change display of the notice target. The hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be announced is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed at an arbitrary shift timing until (hold information) is started. And include. On the other hand, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the notice target is started. It is displayed by changing from the special aspect to the first special aspect or the second special aspect.

The shift timing of the hold display is that in the effect symbol change start process described later, the first hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c is deleted, the remaining hold display is shifted one by one, and the total hold storage display is displayed. This is the timing for updating the total pending storage number display in the unit 18c (specifically, the timing at which step S1800 is executed). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is deleted at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed in the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed in the fourth is the third display. It is shifted to the area, and the hold display displayed in the fifth position is shifted to the fourth display area.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination table. In step S67107, the effect control CPU 101 determines the look-ahead effect pattern based on the look-ahead effect pattern determination table and the total number of reserved storages. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 hits the display result of the variation display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probability change big hit", "sudden change big hit" or "small". In the case of "hit") (that is, when the winning determination result 8 is specified to the winning determination result 13 is specified), the hit-time look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 (A) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect pattern as the first look-ahead effect pattern and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a ratio determined for each total number of reserved storages in the hit-time look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 (A). Decide on either.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 is in the case where the display result of the variation display indicated by the extracted latest winning judgment result is "off" (that is, when the winning judgment result 1 is specified to the winning judgment result 7 is specified). , The hit-time look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect pattern as the first look-ahead effect pattern and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a ratio determined for each total number of reserved memories in the out-of-order look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 (B). Decide on either.

For example, the display result of the variable display indicated by the judgment result at the time of winning is a hit (for example, "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", "sudden probability variation jackpot" or "small hit"), and the total number of reserved memories is 2. In some cases, the effect control CPU 101 determines the look-ahead effect pattern as the first look-ahead effect pattern at a rate of 35% and the second look-ahead effect pattern at a rate of 65%. Further, for example, when the display result of the variation display indicated by the winning determination result is "missing" and the total number of reserved storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect pattern at a ratio of 65%. The first look-ahead effect pattern is determined by, and the second look-ahead effect pattern is determined at a rate of 35%.

What is characteristic of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is that the display result of the variation display is a hit (for example, "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" as compared with the case where the display result of the variation display is "off". , "Sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit"), the determination value is set so that the ratio determined by the second look-ahead effect pattern is higher. By having such a feature, when the look-ahead effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then changed to the special mode and displayed. ), Compared to when the look-ahead effect is performed in the first look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode without being displayed in a special mode), the variable display to be notified is hit. Can be increased. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot", the rate of determining the final display mode as the second special mode is high, so the look-ahead effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern. When (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning and then changed to a special mode and displayed), the hold display displayed in the special mode is a big hit than the first special mode. The rate of change to the second special mode, which has a high degree of expectation, increases. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to which look-ahead effect pattern the look-ahead effect is executed. Further, when the look-ahead effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning), the hold display displayed in the special mode is expected to be higher than that in the first special mode. Since it is easy to change to the second special mode with a high degree, it is possible to raise a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game. Further, in this embodiment, the hold display displayed in the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by the time the variable display corresponding to the hold display (hold information) is started. Since it is displayed, the expectation can be maintained from the display of the hold display in the special mode to the change to the special mode.

Further, what is characteristic of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 73 is that a determination value is set so that the second look-ahead effect pattern is not determined when the total number of reserved storages is 1. In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is subject to advance notice. It is an arbitrary shift timing until the fluctuation display is started. However, when the total number of hold storages is 1 (that is, when only the hold display corresponding to the change display of the notice target is displayed), if the hold display is shifted once, the change display of the notice target is supported. The hold display is deleted. Therefore, when the total number of hold storages is 1, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice cannot be changed at the shift timing. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 1, the determination value is set so that the second look-ahead effect pattern is not determined.

In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the second In the look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is set as an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the advance notice target is started. Not limited to this, other timings may be used. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during the variable display (a period spanning one variable display or a plurality of variable displays) that is executed before the variable display of the notice target is started. In this case, for example, even when the total number of reserved memories is 1, the second look-ahead effect pattern can be determined, the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and the hold display (hold information) is supported. By the time the variable display is started, the special mode may be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode for display.

In the example shown in FIG. 73, when the display result indicated by the winning determination result is a hit (for example, "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", "sudden probability variation jackpot" or "small hit"), "missing". A look-ahead effect pattern determination table corresponding to the case of is provided. For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability change jackpot" and the case of "sudden probability variation jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot" are provided. In the case of "small hit", a look-ahead effect pattern determination table for determining one of the look-ahead effect patterns at a different ratio may be provided. Further, for example, similarly to the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. 72 (A), a look-ahead effect pattern determination table for determining one of the look-ahead effect patterns at a different ratio is provided for each variation pattern shown in the winning determination result. You may do so. By doing so, when the look-ahead effect is executed in the first look-ahead effect pattern, in addition to increasing the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of the notice target, a reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed. The proportion can also be increased.

When the look-ahead effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The determined change timing (shift count) is set in the shift count counter for specifying the change timing (shift count) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the notice target changes is the shift timing of the arbitrary hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (number of shifts), it is determined how many shifts are performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target to change the display mode. For example, if the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a change timing determination table. In step S67108, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target based on the change timing determination table and the total number of hold storages. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 hits the display result of the variation display indicated by the extracted latest winning determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probability change big hit", "sudden change big hit" or "small". (That is, when the winning determination result 8 is specified to the winning determination result 13 is specified), and when the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first look-ahead effect pattern, FIG. 74 (A) shows. The first pre-reading effect change timing determination table at the time of hit is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each total number of hold storages in the hit time first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 (A). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

In the example shown in FIG. 74, the fact that the change timing (number of shifts) is 0 means that the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning. When displaying the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning, for example, it is realized by displaying a new hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode from the beginning. Alternatively, it may be realized by displaying the new hold display in the normal mode once, and immediately after that, changing the display to the first special mode or the second special mode.

Further, in the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variation display indicated by the latest extracted winning judgment result is "missing" (that is, when the winning judgment result 1 is specified to the winning judgment result 7 is specified). When the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first look-ahead effect pattern, the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of deviation shown in FIG. 74 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each total number of hold storages in the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of deviation shown in FIG. 74 (B). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

In addition, the effect control CPU 101 is hit by the display result of the variation display indicated by the latest extracted winning determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probability change big hit", "sudden change big hit" or "small hit"). (That is, when the winning determination result 8 is specified to the winning determination result 13 is specified), and when the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hit time shown in FIG. 74 (C). The second look-ahead effect change timing determination table is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the change display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each total number of hold storages in the hit second look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 (C). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

Further, in the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variation display indicated by the latest extracted winning judgment result is "missing" (that is, when the winning judgment result 1 is specified to the winning judgment result 7 is specified). When the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second look-ahead effect pattern, the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of deviation shown in FIG. 74 (D) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target at a rate determined for each total number of hold storages in the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of deviation shown in FIG. 74 (D). The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

For example, when the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table at the time of hit is used and the total number of reserved storage is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) to 0 (winning) at a rate of 50%. Hour), the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. Further, when the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of loss is used and the total number of reserved storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) to 0 (winning) at a rate of 20%. Hour), the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 50%.

Further, for example, when the second pre-reading effect change timing determination table at the time of hit is used and the total number of reserved storage is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (number of shifts) to 1 at a rate of 30%. And the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 70%. Further, when the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of loss is used and the total number of reserved storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) to 1 at a rate of 70%. Then, the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%.

What is characteristic of the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 is that in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, the display result of the variation display is hit as compared with the case where the display result of the variation display is "off". (For example, in the case of "normal big hit", "probability big hit", "sudden change big hit" or "small hit"), the judgment value is set so that the ratio of determining the change timing with a small number of shifts is higher. That is what has been done. By having such a feature, when the look-ahead effect is performed in the first look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode without being displayed in a special mode once), the hold display is displayed. When the number of shifts is changed from the normal mode to the special mode with a smaller number of shifts, the rate of hits can be increased in the variable display of the advance notice, and the special mode is displayed at the time of starting winning (0 shifts). It is possible to increase the rate of hits. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the hold display changes, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

What is characteristic of the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 74 is that in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, the display result of the variation display is hit as compared with the case where the display result of the variation display is "off". (For example, the judgment value is set so that the ratio of determining the change timing with a large number of shifts is higher in the case of "normal big hit", "probability change big hit", "sudden change big hit" or "small hit"). That is what has been done. By having such a feature, when the look-ahead effect is performed in the second look-ahead effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning and then changed to the special mode), When the hold display of the special mode is changed to the special mode with a larger number of shifts (that is, after many shifts have been made), the rate of hits in the variable display to be announced can be increased. That is, the longer the period from when the hold display is displayed in the special mode to when it changes to the special mode (that is, the later the timing of the change), the higher the rate at which a hit occurs in the variable display to be announced. .. Therefore, the hold display can be changed at a plurality of timings, and the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode changes can be noticed, so that the game interest can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display is an arbitrary shift timing until the change display of the notice target is started. When the display mode can be changed at an arbitrary timing until the display is started, for example, a plurality of types of change timing patterns that can specify the timing to be changed (such as during a specific shift timing or a specific variation display). May be provided and either one may be selected according to the judgment result at the time of winning.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, the one with a smaller number of shifts (that is, the earlier the timing of change) is advantageous, and in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, the number of shifts is large. The one (that is, the later the timing of change) is set to be advantageous, but in order to make it easier for the player to understand, for example, the one with a large number of shifts (that is, the change) even in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern. The later the timing) may be set to be advantageous. Further, for example, even in the case of the second look-ahead effect pattern, the one with a smaller number of shifts (that is, the earlier the timing of change) may be set to be advantageous.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 74, when the display result indicated by the winning determination result is a hit (for example, "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", "sudden probability variation jackpot" or "small hit"), "missing". A look-ahead effect pattern determination table corresponding to the case of is provided. For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability change jackpot" and the case of "sudden probability change jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot" are provided. A change timing determination table that determines at any change timing (number of shifts) at different ratios may be provided in the case of "small hit". Further, for example, as in the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. 72 (A), the change determined at any one of the change timings (number of shifts) at a different rate for each variation pattern shown in the winning determination result. A timing determination table may be provided. By doing so, the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of the notice target is different according to the change timing of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target, and the rate at which the reach effect with high expectation is performed is performed. Can also be different.

In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, a new hold display is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, but the hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start winning, and then arbitrarily. The normal mode may be changed to the special mode at the timing of, and the special mode may be changed to the special mode at any later timing.

When the change timing (number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect at the change timing of the hold display when the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second look-ahead effect pattern (Y in step S67109). The production mode of the suggestion effect is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes can be executed at the shift timing. Further, the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67110, the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

In this embodiment, the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode at a different rate depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode is high, and when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, it is held. The rate at which the display changes to the second special aspect is high. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display changes by executing the suggestion effect, and which special mode is likely to change depending on which effect mode the suggestion effect is executed. It is suggested. Although details will be described later, the suggestion effect is also executed at a shift timing other than the change timing of the hold display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between them, the suggestion effect executed at the change timing of the hold display is also called a suggestion effect (success pattern), and the suggestion effect executed at a shift timing other than the change timing of the hold display is suggested (passed). Also called pattern). In this embodiment, both the suggestion effect (success pattern) and the suggestion effect (passing pattern) are executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes may differ depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode A different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode of this embodiment), the hold display changes. The suggestive effect is executed in the second effect mode (for example, the first effect mode B different from the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the first effect mode A of this embodiment). If so, the rate at which the hold display changes may be increased. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (first effect mode A), the ratio of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is high, and the suggestion effect is the second effect mode (first effect mode B). When it is executed in, the ratio of the suggestion effect (passing pattern) may be increased.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestion effect mode determination table. In step S67110, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display by using the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 75. Specifically, based on the latest extracted winning judgment result, the production mode is set to the first production mode or the production mode at a ratio determined for each winning judgment result (display result of variable display) in the final display mode determination table. It is determined to be one of the second production modes. For example, when the winning judgment result indicates that the display result of the variable display is "missing" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 designation to the winning judgment result 7 designation), the effect control CPU 101 , 80% of the production modes are determined as the first production mode, and 20% of the production modes are determined as the second production mode. Further, for example, when the winning judgment result indicates that the display result of the variable display is "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot" (corresponding to winning judgment result 8 designation to winning judgment result 12 designation). The effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 20%, and determines the effect mode as the second effect mode at a rate of 80%. Further, for example, when the judgment result at the time of winning indicates that the display result of the variation display is "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" (corresponding to the designation of the judgment result 13 at the time of winning), it is for effect control. The CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 50%, and determines the effect mode as the second effect mode at a rate of 50%.

What is characteristic of the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 75 is that the display result is "corresponding to the winning judgment result 1 designation to the winning judgment result 7 designation" as compared with the case where the display result is "off". In the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot" (corresponding to the winning judgment result 8 designation to the winning judgment result 12 designation), the ratio of being determined in the second production mode is set to be higher. That is. By having such a feature, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of the notice target is higher than when it is displayed in the first effect mode. can do. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot", the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode because the final display mode of the hold display is likely to be the second special mode. When this happens, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes to the second special mode, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode, increases. Therefore, it is possible to give diversity to the suggestion effect, and it is possible to pay attention to which effect mode the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the example shown in FIG. 75, a suggestion effect is produced for each display result (“missing”, “normal jackpot” or “probability change jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot” or “small hit”) indicated by the winning judgment result. The ratio for determining the mode is determined. For example, as in the look-ahead effect execution determination table of FIG. 72 (A), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined for each variation pattern shown in the winning determination result. The determination value (ratio) for this purpose may be set. By doing so, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice target, the rate at which a reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed. Can also be raised.

In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is always executed at the shift timing when the display mode of the hold display changes, but the suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, it is possible to enhance the unexpected feeling.

Further, in this embodiment, two types of effect modes, a first effect mode and a second effect mode, are provided as the effect mode of the suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of effect modes are provided. , The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected according to the display result is different).

When the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a look-ahead effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted (step S67111).

When the look-ahead effect restriction flag is set, the process of step S67101 controls so that the look-ahead effect is not executed repeatedly. That is, in this embodiment, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode, it is controlled not to newly execute the look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is restricted that a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode. Therefore, by displaying the plurality of hold displays in a special mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be focused on.

In this embodiment, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode, it is controlled not to execute the look-ahead effect repeatedly, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is executed repeatedly. It may be allowed to do at a certain rate, or it may be completely allowed. That is, by omitting the process of step S67111 at a constant rate or completely, it is possible to allow a plurality of hold displays to be displayed in a special mode at a constant rate or completely. Further, for example, when any of the hold displays is displayed not only in the special mode but also in the first special mode or the second special mode, it may be controlled so that the look-ahead effect is not repeated. For example, when the process of step S67114 is executed, when the process of step S67115 is executed, or when it is determined that it is the timing to change the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode in the effect symbol change start process described later (for example). , Step S1803, etc.) can be realized by setting the look-ahead effect restriction flag. Further, in this case, the look-ahead effect restriction flag may be reset when the hold display displayed in the special mode is erased (that is, the look-ahead effect is displayed while the hold display is displayed in the special mode). Execution is restricted). By doing so, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, it is restricted that the other hold display is displayed in the display mode other than the normal mode by the new look-ahead effect. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to understand which hold display should be focused on.

Further, for example, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode, a first special mode, or a second special mode, a new look-ahead effect may be easily executed. That is, the look-ahead effect may be repeated to facilitate execution. Further, for example, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, a probability change state or a time saving state), the look-ahead effect may be easily executed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration that allows the pre-reading effect to be repeatedly executed at a fixed ratio, it can be realized by increasing the allowable ratio in the case of a specific gaming state.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold storage number display unit 18c to display a new hold display in a special mode (step S67112). In step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 controls the new hold display to be displayed in a special mode, and also provides information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and an effect of the suggestion effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating the mode is stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing this information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the suggestion effect effect mode are determined in the effect symbol variation start process described later.

Further, when the look-ahead effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second look-ahead effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, when the first look-ahead effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 is set in step S67108. It is confirmed whether or not the determined change timing is the start winning prize (step S67113). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the shift count counter is 0. Then, if the change timing is the start winning prize (Y in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage number display unit 18c to display a new hold display in the final display mode determined in step S67107. (Step S67114).

Further, if the change timing is not at the time of winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display, as in step S67110 described above. Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold storage number display unit 18c so that the new hold display is displayed in the normal mode (step S67116). In step S67116 as well (for example, only when the transition from step S67115 is performed), the effect control CPU 101 is controlled to display a new hold display as in step S67112, and the final display determined in step S67106 is displayed. The information indicating the mode and the information indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67115 are stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing this information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the suggestion effect effect mode are determined in the effect symbol variation start process described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the winning determination result designation command is received, in the look-ahead effect determination process, a new hold display is displayed in any of the normal mode, the special mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode. The process of displaying with is performed.

In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the order of winning either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the variable display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is prioritized. When it is configured to execute, (1) it is configured to perform the look-ahead effect only for the variable display of the first special symbol, and (2) only the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. There are three possible configurations: one is to perform a look-ahead effect on the target, and (3) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to perform a look-ahead effect on a variable display. ..

When the configuration of (1) above is added to the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the shift count counter is based on the upper limit of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example). Is set to a maximum of 4. However, in the configuration of (1) above, even if the look-ahead effect of changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, if a prize is generated in the second start winning opening 14, the second 2 Since the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted (priority is given to the winning order), for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, even if it is the shift timing, the effect symbol described later is executed. It is desirable that the value of the shift count counter is not subtracted in step S1802b of the fluctuation start processing. Further, in the case of the configuration of (3) above, when the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also performed. Is preferably configured so that the value of the shift count counter is not subtracted in step S1802b of the effect symbol variation start processing described later.

Further, when the configuration of (2) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the shift is performed according to the upper limit of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example). A maximum of 4 is set in the count counter. In this case, unlike the configuration of (1) above, the value of the shift count counter is subtracted when the shift timing is reached, regardless of whether the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Further, in the same way, when the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the configuration of (3) above, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. Even when the fluctuation display is performed, the value of the shift count counter is subtracted when the shift timing is reached.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the pre-reading effect is not performed for the variable display of the first special symbol during the high base. You may. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the look-ahead effect based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 during the big hit game is not performed. May be good. In such a configuration, for example, during a high base or a big hit game, even if a prize is generated in the first start winning opening 13 in the game control microcomputer 560, the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed. It can be realized by not executing it, discarding the winning judgment result specification command received by the effect control microcomputer 560, or controlling not to execute the look-ahead effect even if it is decided to execute it. .. Further, when the configuration of (3) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the look-ahead based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 during the high base or the big hit game is performed. Although the effect is not performed, the look-ahead effect based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14 may be performed. In such a configuration, for example, during a high base or a big hit game, even if a prize is generated in the first start winning opening 13 in the game control microcomputer 560, the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed. Even if it is decided not to be performed, the winning judgment result specification command based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 received by the effect control microcomputer 560 is discarded, or the pre-reading effect is determined to be executed, the command is not executed. It can be realized by controlling in this way.

When the configuration of (1) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the hold memory based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 14 exists. When a prize is generated in the first start winning opening 13, the look-ahead effect for the reserved memory based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 may not be executed. Further, when the configuration of (1) above is added to the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the look-ahead effect for the reserved memory based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13 is performed. When a prize is generated in the second start winning opening 14 while the execution is decided, the execution of the pre-reading effect that has already been decided may be cancelled.

In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the order of winning any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the pre-reading effect is performed only for the variable display of the first special symbol (the above ((1) above. 1)), or a configuration ((2) above) in which the look-ahead effect is performed only for the variable display of the second special symbol may be added. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed in the order of winning any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, during the high base or the big hit game, the first start winning opening 13 is reached. It is also possible not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the prize.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 53. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first winning determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the contents of the winning determination result storage buffer. Is shifted, the first hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c is deleted, the remaining hold display is shifted one by one, and the total hold storage number display in the total hold storage display unit 18c is updated (. Step S1800). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the total hold storage display unit 18c are displayed, the first hold display is deleted at the shift timing and the second hold display is displayed. The hold display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed in the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed in the fourth is the third display. It is shifted to the area, and the hold display displayed in the fifth position is shifted to the fourth display area. When the variation display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is preferentially executed, the effect control CPU 101 synchronizes with the variation display of the first special symbol. When the variation display of the effect symbol is executed (specifically, when the first symbol variation specification command reception flag is set), the first winning determination result storage buffer stores the first. The winning judgment result is deleted, and the contents of the first winning judgment result storage buffer are shifted. In addition, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), the second prize is awarded. The first winning judgment result stored in the judgment result storage buffer is deleted, and the contents of the second winning judgment result storage buffer are shifted.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (shift number) is greater than 0 (step S1801). When the value of the shift count counter is larger than 0, it is determined that the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode is executed for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c. Is shown. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect (change the display mode of the hold display).

When the value of the shift count counter is not larger than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, it is determined that the shift count counter value is 0 and the look-ahead effect is executed (the display mode of the hold display is changed). If not, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1804.

On the other hand, when the value of the shift count counter is larger than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect (change the display mode of the hold display), it is for effect control. The CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the total reserved storage counter for production (step S1802a). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the shift number counter (step S1802b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the shift number counter is 0 (step S1803). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift count counter in step S1802b, the fact that the shift count counter value becomes 0 means that one of the hold displays displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c is displayed. It indicates that it is time to execute the look-ahead effect to be changed. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether or not it is the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display.

In step S1803, when the value of the shift count counter is not 0, that is, when it is not the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1804. On the other hand, when the value of the shift count counter is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1808.

In step S1804, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1804).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives the effect symbol display result (that is, the received display result specification command) according to the variation pattern command read in step S1804 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area. The stop symbol) is determined (step S1805). That is, by executing the process of step S1805 by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode of the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not executed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) executed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect executed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as a suggestion effect (passing pattern).

In step S1806, the effect control CPU 101 suggests the suggestion shown in FIG. 76 (A) when the look-ahead effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when none of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c. It is determined that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is not executed, or is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode, at the ratio of the effect (passing pattern) determination table. Further, the effect control CPU 101 has a suggestion effect shown in FIG. 76 (B) when the look-ahead effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c. (Passing pattern) It is determined that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is not executed or is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode at the ratio of the determination table. In the suggestion effect (passing pattern) determination table, determination values corresponding to the determination items (“no effect”, “first effect mode”, or “second effect mode”) are assigned, but FIG. 76 ( In the examples shown in A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect (passing pattern), and is assigned a determination value that matches the extracted random number (“No effect”, “No. 1”. "1 production mode" or "second production mode") is determined.

For example, when the look-ahead effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when none of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c, it is determined that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is not executed at a rate of 60%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode at a rate of 30%, and that the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode at a rate of 10%. Further, when the look-ahead effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c, the suggestion effect (passing pattern) must be executed at a rate of 0%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the first effect mode at a rate of 60%, and the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (A) and 76 (B), in this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect restriction flag is set, that is, one of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c. If yes, the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than if not. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment. In this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed even at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect may not be executed. However, even in this case as well, it is desirable that the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold display is not displayed in a special mode.

Further, when the look-ahead effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any of the hold displays is displayed in a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c, the final display mode of the hold display is the first display mode or Depending on which of the second display modes, the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode at different ratios. For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second display mode having a higher expectation than the first display mode, the effect mode of the suggestion effect becomes the second effect mode having a higher expectation than the first display mode. The determined rate may be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which an arrow flies from the right side of the display area. , When the display mode of the hold display changes (in the case of a suggestion effect (success pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified. Further, when the display mode of the hold display does not change (in the case of the suggestion effect (passing pattern)), the display control is performed so that the flying arrow passes through the display area as it is. Therefore, in step S1806, it is not necessary to specify the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified by using the total hold storage number counter for production as in step S1811 described later. In addition, for example, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes both when it is the timing to change the display mode of the hold display and when it is not the timing, in the effect display device 9. When it is time to control the display in which the arrow flying from the right side of the display area pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified and change the display mode of the hold display, the hold display in which the arrow pierces is displayed. When the display mode is changed (corresponding to the suggestion effect (success pattern)) and it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display pierced by the arrow is not changed (the suggestion effect (passing pattern) of this example. ) Equivalent to). In this case, in step S1806, the effect control CPU 101 identifies the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified by using the effect total hold storage number counter as in step S1811, which will be described later, and steps S1807. The process table for executing the suggestion effect for the hold display specified in the above may be selected, or the hold display to which the arrow pierces is randomly determined from the displayed hold displays, and the determined hold display is selected. The process table for executing the suggestion effect may be selected.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the variation pattern of the determined suggestion effect (passing pattern) (step S1807). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1812).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 27R and 27L as production parts) is executed (step S1813). For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the sound from the speakers 27R and 27L, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S1814), and processes the effect control process flag value during the effect symbol variation process (step S802). The value corresponds to (step S1815).

When it is determined in step S1803 that the value of the shift count counter is 0, that is, when it is the change timing of the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the look-ahead effect restriction flag. If so, reset it (step S1808). By executing such a process, in this embodiment, it is possible to restrict the execution of a new look-ahead effect during the period when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, and the plurality of hold displays are special. It is possible to limit the display in the mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1809). Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives the effect symbol display result (that is, the received display result specification command) according to the variation pattern command read in step S1809 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area. The stop symbol) is determined (step S1810).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an effect mode of the suggestion effect, a final display mode of the hold display specified by the total hold storage number counter for the effect, and a process table for changing the display mode according to the fluctuation pattern. (Step S1811). Then, the process proceeds to step S1812.

The process table for changing the display mode is a process table for changing the display mode of the effect symbol. At the start of the change of the effect symbol, a suggestion effect (success pattern) is executed, and a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of a specific hold display is executed. A table in which process data for control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of process tables for changing the display mode are provided according to the mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) to be executed and the mode of the look-ahead effect. Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) determined in the look-ahead effect determination process (step S67110 or S67115) and stored (in this example, the first effect mode or the second effect mode). And the hold display of the production target specified by the total hold storage counter for production (for example, when the value of the total hold storage counter for production is 2, the second hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c). , A suggestion effect (success pattern) in any mode based on the final display mode (first display mode or second display mode in this example) determined and stored in the look-ahead effect determination process (step S67106). ) Is executed, and it is possible to specify which hold display is to be changed to what display mode to execute the look-ahead effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 has a plurality of types of display modes depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the hold display specified by the total hold storage number counter for the effect, and the variation pattern. By selecting one of the process tables for change and executing the control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data 1 of the process table for change, the effect mode determined by the look-ahead effect determination process. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (success pattern) in, and execute a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target to the determined display mode.

Next, a specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the look-ahead effect based on the first look-ahead effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the effect display device 9, the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and two hold displays are displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c in a normal mode (“◯” in this example). If the start winning is performed while the display is displayed, the mode of the look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and the mode of the suggestion effect are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the decision result. To. In the example shown in FIG. 77, the look-ahead effect pattern is determined as the first look-ahead effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is set at the start winning prize (number of shifts 0) or shift. Determine the number of times 1. Further, the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

In this embodiment, in the look-ahead effect based on the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is not once displayed in a special mode, but is the first of the final display modes. It is displayed in a special mode or a second special mode. Further, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is the start winning timing or an arbitrary shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the time of starting winning (number of shifts 0) and the final display mode is determined as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (B1), the total is added at the timing of starting winning. The third hold display is displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c in the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "○"). Further, when the change timing is determined at the time of starting prize (number of shifts 0) and the final display mode is determined as the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (B2), the total is added at the timing of starting winning. The hold storage display unit 18c displays the third hold display in the second special mode (in this example, two “x” s are included in the “◯”).

Further, even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not at the start winning timing (shift number 0) but at an arbitrary shift timing (here, shift number 1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 77 (B3), at the start winning timing, the total hold storage display unit 18c displays the third hold display in the normal mode (“◯” in this example). Then, when the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped (FIG. 77 (C)) and the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted and 2 The third and third hold displays are shifted respectively.

At this time, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined to be the first effect mode, the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. As a result, in the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 77 (D1)).

Then, when the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E1), the second hold display (FIG. 77) of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing. An effect in which a black arrow is pierced (corresponding to the hold display newly displayed in (B3)) (suggestion effect of the first effect mode (success pattern)) is performed, and a hold display in which a black arrow is pierced is the first special mode. (In this example, "x" is included in "○") and it is displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E2), the second hold display (FIG. 77) of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing. An effect in which a black arrow is pierced (corresponding to the hold display newly displayed in (B3)) (suggestion effect of the first effect mode (success pattern)) is performed, and a hold display in which a black arrow is pierced is the second special mode. (In this example, two "x" are included in "○") and it is displayed.

Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is determined to be the second effect mode, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes. In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 77 (D2)).

Then, when the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E3), the second hold display (FIG. 77) of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing. An effect in which a white arrow is stabbed in (corresponding to the hold display newly displayed in (B3)) (suggestion effect of the second effect mode (success pattern)) is performed, and a hold display in which a white arrow is stabbed is the first special mode. (In this example, "x" is included in "○") and it is displayed. Further, when the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 77 (E4), the second hold display (FIG. 77) of the total hold storage display unit 18c at the shift timing. An effect in which a white arrow is pierced (corresponding to the hold display newly displayed in (B3)) is performed (a suggestion effect of the second effect mode (success pattern)), and a hold display in which a white arrow is pierced is the second special mode. (In this example, two "x" are included in "○") and it is displayed.

As already described, in this embodiment, when the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, the display mode of the hold display is the first as compared with the case of the first effect mode. It is configured so that the ratio of the second special mode, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first special mode, is higher. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is the first effect mode, that is, when a black arrow flies and sticks in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode with low expectation is high. That is, the ratio of transition from FIG. 77 (D1) to FIG. 77 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the effect mode of the suggestion effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, that is, when a white arrow flies and sticks in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the second special mode with high expectation is high. That is, the ratio of transition from FIG. 77 (D2) to FIG. 77 (E4) is high. By being configured in this way, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) in which the arrow flies and sticks in the hold display, it is made to feel that the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode, and the suggestion effect is the first effect mode. When it is done in, that is, when a black arrow flies, you can make it feel that you want it to pass without sticking to the hold display (it is a suggestion effect (passing pattern)).

78 and 79 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the look-ahead effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 78 (A), in the effect display device 9, the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and two hold displays are displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c in a normal mode (“◯” in this example). If the start winning is performed while the display is displayed, the look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and suggestion effect mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the decision result. In the examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be the second look-ahead effect pattern, the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is the number of shifts 1 or the number of shifts 2. To decide. In addition, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

In this embodiment, in the look-ahead effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at an arbitrary shift timing. , The final display mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect pattern is determined to be the second look-ahead effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), a third hold display is displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c at the start winning timing (a special mode ( In this example, 6 lines are drawn outside the "○").

Then, when the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped (FIG. 78 (C)) and the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted and 2 The third and third hold displays are shifted respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect suggesting that the hold display changes. (Second effect mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 78 (D)).

Here, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 78 (E1), at the shift timing, the total hold storage display unit An effect in which a white arrow is stuck in the second hold display of 18c (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) (suggestion effect of the second effect mode (success pattern)) is performed. At the same time, the hold display in which the white arrow is stuck is displayed by changing from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "○"). When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, the total hold storage display unit 18c is determined at the shift timing, as shown in FIG. 78 (E2). A white arrow sticks into the second hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) (suggestion effect of the second effect mode (success pattern)). , The hold display with a white arrow is displayed changing from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in the "○").

Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 78 (E3), a suggestion effect (second effect mode) in which the white arrow passes without sticking to any of the hold displays at the shift timing. Suggestion effect (passing pattern)) is performed. The suggestion effect shown in FIG. 78 (E3) is performed when it is determined in the effect symbol variation start process that the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is to be executed in the second effect mode. As described above, in this embodiment, as a suggestion effect, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) flies from the right side of the display area. This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when the arrow sticks to the hold display (when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is performed), the display mode changes and the arrow sticks to any hold display. The display mode does not change when the arrow passes through (when the suggestion effect (passing pattern) is performed).

After that, when the variation display of the effect symbol is stopped (FIG. 79 (F)) and the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is deleted and 2 The second hold display is shifted. At this time, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the hold display changes, the effect display device 9 performs display control in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) (FIG. 79 (G)). ).

Then, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 79 (H1), the total hold storage display unit 18c is determined at the shift timing. A black arrow sticks into the first hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) (suggestion effect of the first effect mode (success pattern)). , The hold display with a black arrow is displayed changing from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "○"). Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 79 (H2), the total hold storage display unit 18c is determined at the shift timing. A black arrow sticks into the first hold display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 78 (B3)) (suggestion effect of the second effect mode (success pattern)). , The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in the "○").

As shown in FIG. 77, in this embodiment, in the look-ahead effect based on the first look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is not once displayed in a special mode. , Is displayed in the first special aspect or the second special aspect of the final display aspect. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the start winning timing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the look-ahead effect based on the second look-ahead effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning. , Is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode at an arbitrary shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, since the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings and displayed, there are various timings for changing the display mode of the hold display. When the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display can be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the first special mode before the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold display is started. 2 Since the display is changed to a special mode, the game entertainment can be improved.

[Summary of the second embodiment]
(1) As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the display result and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the time of starting winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning. It is equipped with a determination means for determining. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 is realized by executing a look-ahead effect determination process, an effect symbol change start process, and the like, and is a hold display corresponding to the hold storage based on the determination result by the determination means (total hold storage display). It is provided with an effect executing means for executing a look-ahead effect for displaying the reserved memory in the unit 18c in the first special mode or the second special mode. Then, the effect executing means can change the hold display to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (starting winning timing, shift timing, etc.) and display the hold display in the special mode. When displayed in, the hold display is controlled to be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed by the time the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold display is started. It is configured to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the hold display to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings and display the hold display, so that the display mode of the hold display can be changed at various timings. In addition to being able to have sex, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed, so that the game entertainment can be improved. it can.

(2) Further, in this embodiment, whether or not the display mode of the hold display, which is realized by executing the pre-reading effect determination process, the effect symbol change start process, and the like, is changed in the effect control microcomputer 100. It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect (suggestion effect (success pattern) and suggestion effect (passing pattern)). Then, the suggestion effect executing means is configured to execute the suggestion effect more frequently when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect is executed at a high frequency, so that the expectation can be raised and the game entertainment can be improved.

(3) Further, in this embodiment, when the determination means determines that the display result is a big hit, the effect executing means is a hold memory which is a determination target at a higher rate than when it is determined that the display result is not a big hit. The hold display corresponding to is displayed in the second special mode. Further, when the effect execution means performs the look-ahead effect in the second look-ahead effect pattern in which the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed, the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. It is configured to display the hold display in the second special mode at a higher rate than when the look-ahead effect is performed in the first look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the proportion of the hold display displayed in the second special mode, which is highly expected to be a big hit, is high, so that the expectation can be increased. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) Further, in this embodiment, the effect executing means determines that the pre-reading effect is executed in the second pre-reading effect pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the change timing is set to the time of winning (the number of fluctuations is 0). The hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning timing when the decision is made), and the first timing (for example, the first hold display after the start winning) until the variable display based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold display is started is started. The hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the first timing at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the timing when the second hold display shift is performed after the start winning). 2 It is possible to change the display to a special mode. Then, the effect executing means sets the hold display from the special mode at different ratios at the first timing or the second timing depending on whether the determination result is determined to be a big hit or not a big hit by the determination means. It is configured to be displayed by changing to one special mode or the second special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the display mode changes, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(5) Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 newly suspends when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, which is realized by executing the process of setting the look-ahead effect restriction flag. It is configured to provide limiting means for limiting the display of the display in a special manner. With such a configuration, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a special mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be focused on.

(6) Further, in this embodiment, when the determination means determines that the display result is a big hit, the effect executing means is subject to the determination at a higher rate than when it is determined that the display result is not a big hit. The hold display corresponding to the hold storage is displayed in the second special mode. Further, when the effect execution means performs the look-ahead effect in the first look-ahead effect pattern in which the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed, the first effect (for example, a black arrow is displayed. When a suggestion effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode that flies and sticks to the hold display is performed, and the hold display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode and displayed, and the first effect Performs a different second effect (for example, a suggestion effect (success pattern) of a second effect mode in which a white arrow flies and sticks in the hold display), and changes the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. There are times when it is displayed. Then, the effect executing means is configured to change the hold display to the first special mode or the second special mode at different ratios when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed. ing. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, it is possible to pay attention to which of the first effect and the second effect is performed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. it can.

In this embodiment, in the first look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in the special mode changes from the start winning timing and the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. It was one of the shift timings to be performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other timings may be included. For example, an arbitrary timing until the variable display of the notice target is started (specifically, a period during one variable display or a period spanning a plurality of variable displays executed until the variable display of the notice target is started). ) May display the hold display in a special mode.

(7) Further, in this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display is displayed in a special mode is only the timing of the start winning, but not limited to this, at the timing of the starting winning. It may be displayed in a normal mode, and may be changed to a special mode at an arbitrary shift timing and displayed, or may be displayed at an arbitrary timing (specifically, a change in the notice target) until the display of the change of the notice target is started. The hold display may be displayed in a special mode during one variation display or a period spanning a plurality of variation displays that is executed before the display is started. Further, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode is not limited to the shift timing, and after the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the variable display to be notified is displayed. It may be any timing until the start (specifically, a period during one fluctuation display or a period spanning a plurality of fluctuation displays that is executed until the fluctuation display to be announced is started).

(8) Further, in this embodiment, as the effect pattern of the look-ahead effect, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is not once displayed in a special mode, but is the final display mode. The first look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the 1 special mode or the 2nd special mode and the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified at the timing of the start winning are displayed in the special mode, and the arbitrary shift timing is displayed. The first special aspect or the second look-ahead effect pattern displayed in the second special aspect of the final display mode is included, but only the second look-ahead effect pattern may be included. Even in this case, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is once displayed in a special mode, but there are multiple timings from the special mode to the special mode. Since it is changed at (arbitrary timing such as shift timing), it is possible to give variety to the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display and improve the game entertainment.

(9) Further, in this embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the hold display is always displayed by changing from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode. It may not be changed in a special mode. In this case, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display (hold information) is started without changing the hold display from the special mode to the special mode, compared with the case where the hold display is changed from the special mode to the special mode. It is desirable to configure it so that the rate of big hits is low. By doing so, it is possible to be more interested in the change of the display mode of the hold display from the special mode to the special mode. Further, in this case, the state in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode is configured so that the ratio of the hold display being displayed in the special mode is higher than that in the state in which the hold display is displayed in the normal state. It is desirable to do. By doing so, it is possible to be interested in the change of the display mode of the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode, and it is also possible to increase the expectation when the display mode is displayed in the special mode. ..

(10) In this embodiment, as a suggestion effect, a predetermined display control is performed in the effect display device 9, but together with (or instead of this) an effect of outputting sound from the speaker, The effect of turning on the lamp may be performed. Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect (an arrow pierces (or passes)) that acts on a change in the hold display, and the hold display changes according to the effect result (holds when the arrow pierces). The display changes), but it does not necessarily have to be an effect that affects the change in the hold display. For example, regardless of whether the display mode of the hold display is changed or not, as a suggestion effect, an effect of an arrow sticking into a specific hold display is performed. Then, when the hold display is changed, the hold display where the arrow is pierced by the suggestion effect is changed, and when it is not changed, the hold display where the arrow is pierced by the suggestion effect may not be changed. That is, the mode of suggestion effect (the flying arrow sticks into a specific hold display) is the same when the hold display changes and when it does not change, but the result (the display mode of the hold display where the arrow sticks) is It is also possible to perform a hold change effect in which (whether or not it changes) is different.

[Summary of the whole embodiment]
(1) In the above embodiment, "different ratios" are limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 40%: 60%. Not limited to this, the concept includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

(2) Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is another substrate (for example). , The sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in FIG. 4 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35. ), The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control and lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

(3) Further, in the above embodiment, the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown at times, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc., before reaching (so-called if not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command is the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

(4) Further, the configuration shown in the above embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to various forms of gaming machines. For example, the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments may be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine. In the enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls used in the pachinko machine are enclosed in the enclosed area (for example, in the pachinko machine), and the gaming area provided in the pachinko machine is provided. To launch a game ball, collect the game ball via the game area through a collection unit (for example, each winning port, out port, foul ball return port), and fire the collected game ball to the game area again. Circulate in the enclosed area. Further, in such an enclosed circulation type pachinko machine, when a prize is won in each winning opening, points corresponding to the number of prize balls are added to the card inserted in the card unit instead of the prize ball. Processing is done.

(5) Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and the player operates the operation lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped in response to an operation of a stop button by the player. It is also possible to apply to.

(6) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 effect display device, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 20a 1st special variable winning ball device, 20b 2nd special variable winning ball device, 31 game control board (main board), 56 CPU, 560 game control microcomputer, 80 effect control board, 100 effect control microcomputer, 101 effect control CPU, 109 VDP.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player.
Hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage information,
A hold display means for displaying a hold display according to the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means, and a hold display means.
A decidable means capable of deciding to control to the advantageous state,
A determination means capable of determining that the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the advance notice effect executing means for executing the advance notice effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state by changing the hold display to a display mode different from the normal mode and displaying the display. ,
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes.
The advance notice effect executing means has the advance notice effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is a hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays displayed by the hold display means. And run
The suggestion effect includes a first pattern suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes and a second pattern suggesting that the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the effect mode is the same or similar halfway. Ori
The effect mode of the suggestion effect includes a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.
When the suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the ratio of execution by the second pattern is lower than when the suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed.
The suggestion effect execution means
Regarding the hold display displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the suggestion effect of the second pattern is executed so as to have a higher ratio than the hold display displayed in the normal mode.
After executing the suggestion effect of the second effect mode according to the second pattern for the hold display of 1, the suggestion effect of the first effect mode is not executed for the hold display of 1 .
When the notice effect executing means changes the hold display of the above normal mode to a display mode different from the normal mode, when there is a hold display of a display mode different from the normal mode among the hold displays. , In each case, the ratio of the timing to be changed is determined to be later than that in the case of the hold display in the normal mode.
A game machine characterized by that.